User's Guide

User’s Guide
BASIC
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on Windows.
ADVANCED (ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)

This administrator’s guide provides advanced information for administrator’s to use and
manage the machine.
Some features may not be available depending on model or country.
BASIC
Printing on special media 55
1. Introduction Setting the paper size and type 59
Selecting an output location 61
Key benefits 6
Features by model 8
Useful to know 13
3. Printing
About this user’s guide 14
Printer driver features 63
Safety information 15
Basic printing 64
Machine overview 20
Opening printing preferences 66
Control panel overview 23
Using special print features 74
Connecting a network cable 24
Using direct printing utility 82
Turning on the machine 25
Changing the default print settings 84
Understanding the LEDs 26
Setting your machine as a default machine 85
Display screen and useful menu 29
Printing to a file (PRN) 86
Understanding the pop-up keyboard 38
Mac printing 87
Installing the driver locally 39
Linux printing 89
Reinstalling the driver 42
Unix printing 91
2. Media and Tray 4. Copying

Loading originals 45
Understanding the copy screen 94
Selecting print media 49
Basic copying 103
Loading paper in the tray 50
Quick copying 104
2
BASIC
ID card copying 105 Using SyncThru™ Web Service 149
5. Scan & Send(Scanning) 8. Management Tools
Understanding the Scan & Send screen 108 Accessing management tools 158
Basic scan 116 SyncThru™ Web Service 159
Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software 117 Easy Capture Manager 166
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 118 Samsung AnyWeb Print 167
Mac scanning 120 Easy Eco Driver 168
Linux scanning 121 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 169
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 170
6. Scan & Send(Faxing) Using Samsung Printer Status 173
Using Samsung Printer Experience 175
Preparing to fax 123 Using Box 181
Using a fax in your computer 124
Understanding the fax screen 126 9. Troubleshooting
Sending a fax 135
Receiving a fax 137 Redistributing toner 185
Replacing the toner cartridge 187
7. Setting up an Address Book Replacing the imaging unit 189
Tips for avoiding paper jams 191
Understanding the address screen 143 Clearing jams 192
Using the control panel 145 Understanding display messages 208
3
BASIC
Power and cable connecting problems 213
Solving other problems 214
10. Supplies and Accessories
Ordering supplies and accessories 233

Available consumables 234
Available accessories 235
Available maintenance parts 236
Installing accessories 237
Checking replaceable’s lifespan 241
Using a USB Drive device 242
11. Appendix
Specifications 247
Regulatory information 257
Copyright 269
4
1. Introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes:
• Key benefits 6
• Features by model 8
• Useful to know 13
• About this user’s guide 14
• Safety information 15
• Machine overview 20
• Control panel overview 23
• Connecting a network cable 24
• Turning on the machine 25
• Understanding the LEDs 26
• Display screen and useful menu 29
• Understanding the pop-up keyboard 38
• Installing the driver locally 39
• Reinstalling the driver 42
Key benefits
Environmentally friendly Convenience
• To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature . • You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper . Cloud Print™ enabled apps.
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided • Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
printing). captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard.
• To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by • Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings.
• We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
Fast high resolution printing These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax.
• AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the
ordinary program.
• Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
• You can print with a resolution of Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi effective output
• If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
(1200 x 600 x 2 bit).
drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
• Fast, on-demand printing. www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.
For single-side printing, up to 45 ppm (A4) or up to 47 ppm (Letter).
Key benefits
Wide range of functionality and application support
• Supports various paper sizes .

• Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
“Confidential” .
• You can print in various operating systems .
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
Support XOA applications
The machine supports XOA custom applications.

• Regarding the XOA custom applications, please contact your XOA custom
application provider.
Features by model
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
Operating System M458x series
Windows ●
Mac ●
Linux ●
Unix ●
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. For windows, select the printer driver and software
in the Select Software to Install window.
Software M458x series
SPL printer driver
PCL printer driver ●
PS printer drivera ●
XPS printer drivera ●

Features by model
Software M458x series
Direct Printing Utilitya ●
Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC Settings ●
Fax to PC Settings ●
Device Settings ●
Samsung Printer Status ●
Samsung AnyWeb Printa ●
Samsung Easy Document Creator ●
Easy Capture Manager ●
SyncThru™ Web Service ●
SyncThru Admin Web Service ●
Easy Eco Driver ●
Fax Samsung Network PC Fax ●
Scan Twain scan driver ●
a. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing,
check whether your computer’s OS support the software.
(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)

Features by model
Variety feature
Features M458x series
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN ●
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LANa ○
Google Cloud Print™ ●
AirPrint ●
Wireless/NFC kit ○
Eco printing ●
Duplex (2-sided) printing ●
USB Drive deviceb ●
Memory module ○
Optional tray (SCF) ○
Short Stand ○
Document Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) ●

Feeder
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Features by model
Fax Multi-send ●
Delay send ●
Duplex send ●
Secure receive ●
Duplex print ●
Scan Scanning to email ●
Scanning to SMB server ●
Scanning to FTP server ●
Scan to PC ●
Scan to USB ●
Duplex scan ●
Features by model
Copy ID card copying ●
Reduced or enlarged copying ●
Booklet ●
Poster ●
Imaging Repeat ●
Watermark ●
Stamp ●
N-up ●
Erase Edge ●
Overlay ●
Image Shift ●
Duplex copy ●
a. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some countries, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your
local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine.
b. You can only print files stored on a USB Drive device.
(●: Supported, ○: Optional, Blank: Not supported)

Useful to know
The machine does not print. A paper jam has occurred.
• Open the print queue list and remove the document from the • Open and close the cover (see "Front view" on page 21).
list . • Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
• Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver manual and troubleshoot accordingly.
locally" on page 39).
• Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows .
Printouts are blurry.
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies? • The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
cartridge .
• Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer. • Try a different print resolution setting.
• Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region • Replace the toner cartridge .
to view product service information.
Where can I download the machine’s driver?

The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
• You can get help, support application, machine drivers,
• Turn the product off and on again. manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
• Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
Downloads.
troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the LEDs" on
page 26).
About this user’s guide
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
2
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage. General icons

• Do not discard this manual and keep it for future reference.
• Read the safety information before using the machine. Icon Text Description
• If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting Gives users information to protect the machine from
chapter. Caution
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
• Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury.
Warning
• All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased. Provides additional information or detailed
Note
• The screenshots/some menus in this user’s guide may differ from your specification of the machine function and feature.
machine depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
• The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
• Machine refers to printer or MFP.
1. Introduction 14
Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
4
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read Operating environment
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Warning
3
Important safety symbols

Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or

heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
Warning This could result in electric shock or fire.
personal injury or death.
• If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power
Caution
personal injury or property damage. switch and unplug the machine.
Do not attempt. • The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.

Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
1. Introduction 15
Safety information
5
Caution Operating method
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,

remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. Caution
Be careful, the paper output area is hot. Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
Burns could occur. It can cause damage to the machine.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
request assistance from qualified service personnel. tray.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. You may get injured.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Burns can occur.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could objects.
result in electric shock. It can damage the machine.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
interface cords.
It can damage the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
1. Introduction 16
Safety information
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. Caution
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
units weight.If you have a medical condition that prevents you
exposure.
from lifting, do not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use
This machine's power reception device is the power cord. the appropriate amount of people to lift the device safety.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the Then lift the machine:
electrical outlet. • If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
• If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
6
with 2 people.
Installation / Moving • If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Warning Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover
and trays.
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,
leaks. heat, and humidity.
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a
Place the machine in the environment where it meets the large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute
operating temperature and humidity specification. the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a well-
ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.
Otherwise, quality problems can occur and cause damage to the
machine. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
1. Introduction 17
Safety information
7
Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.

Maintenance / Checking
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet. Caution
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
larger.
machine.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
consumables or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
location, such as a closet.
You could get injured.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Keep cleaning consumables away from children.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
Children could get hurt.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
The machine should be connected tothe power level which is
specified on the label. It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
1. Introduction 18
Safety information
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean When storing consumables such as toner cartridges, keep them
from dust or water. away from children.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
• Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with Using recycled consumables, such as toner, can cause damage to
screws. the machine.
• Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service In case of damage due to the use of recycled consumables, a
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in service fee will be charged.
fire or electric shock.
For consumables that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste
• The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician. toner bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.
• When disposing of the consumables, follow the instructions
8
for disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.
• Do not wash the consumables.
Supply usage
• For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the
bottle.
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine
Caution malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by a user's carelessness.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
it.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,

Do not burn any of the consumables such as toner cartridge or
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
fuser unit.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
1. Introduction 19
Machine overview
9
Components
The actual component may differ from the illustration below. Some components may change depending on the circumstances.
Machine Imaging unit
Power cord Quick installation guide
Software CDa Misc. accessoriesb
a. The software CD contains the print drivers, user’s guide, and software applications.
b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.
1. Introduction 20
Machine overview
10
3 15 Push-release of Multi-purpose
Front view Dual scan document feeder input tray
tray
4 Dual scan document feeder output 14

Multi-purpose tray
tray
5 Control panel 16 Front cover release button
6 Control board cover 17 Output tray
7 Front cover 18 Output support tray
8 Handle 19 USB Drive device port
9 Optional traya 20 Scanner glass
10 Stand 21 Scanner lid
11 Paper level indicator 22 Control panel unlock button
a. Optional feature
1 Dual scan document feeder cover 12 Tray handle
2 Dual scan document feeder width 13

Tray 1
guides
1. Introduction 21
Machine overview
11 12
Inner view Rear view
1 Toner cartridge 1 Wireless/NFC kita port cover 6 Network port
2 Imaging unit 2 Rear cover handle 7 EDI port for card reader
3 Multi-purpose support tray 3 Rear cover 8 USB port
4 Paper width guides on a multi-purpose tray 4 Extension telephone socket 9

Power-switch
(EXT.)
5 Telephone line socket (LINE) 10 Power receptacle
If you want to see the imaging unit, you need to remove the toner cartridge.
a. Optional feature.
1. Introduction 22
Control panel overview
13
Control panel When you use the display screen, use your finger only. The screen may be
damaged with a sharp pen or anything else.
14
Adusting angle of the control panel
You can adjust the angle of the control panel for your convenience. Refer to the
illustration below.
When moving or storing the machine, press the unlock button to fold down
the control panel. The unlock button is located on the top side of the control
panel.
1 Shows the current machine status and prompts

Display screen during an operation. You can set menus easily using
the display screen.
2 a. Power LED Shows the power status of your machine.
Turn the power on or off. When the blue LED is on, the
b. (Power / machine is powered on and you can use it. If you turn
Wakeup) button the machine off, press this button for more than two
seconds, and then confirmation window appears.
3 Shows the status of your machine (see

Status LED
"Understanding the LEDs" on page 26).
1. Introduction 23
Connecting a network cable
This machine has a bulit-in network interface card. You can connect your
machine to a network using a network cable.
1. Introduction 24
Turning on the machine
Keep in mind that you should use the power cord supplied with the
machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage or fire to the machine.
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
You can also turn the machine on pressing the (Power / Wakeup)
• Some parts inside of the machine may be hot when power is on, or after
printing. Be careful not to burn yourself when working inside the
machine.
• Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on or plugged in.
Doing so may give you an electric shock.
• If you turn the machine off directly using the power switch, it could cause
the hard disk problem in the machine.
1. Introduction 25
Understanding the LEDs
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
• Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 23).
• To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part .
• You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’ Samsung Printer Status program window .
• If the problem persists, call a service representative.
15
Status LED
Status Description
Off • The machine is off-line.

• The machine is in power save mode.
Blue On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes.
Copy The machine is copying documents.
Scan The machine is scanning documents.
Print • When the status LED slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
• When the status LED blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
1. Introduction 26
Status Description
Red On • A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge.
• A paper jam has occurred .
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.
• An imaging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to replace the imaging unit.
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared,
the machine resumes its original task.
• The toner cartridge or imaging unit is near the end of its lifea. Order a new toner cartridge or imaging unit. You can temporarily improve print
quality by redistributing the toner.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size.
Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see ). If the problem persists, call for service.
1. Introduction 27
16
Power LED
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
Status Description
Off The machine is off-line.
Blue On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking The machine is in power save mode. When data is received, or any screen is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter. If the problem persists, call for service.
1. Introduction 28
Display screen and useful menu
Swipe
17
Menu navigation Lightly drag your finger across the screen.
You can tailor the machine’s range of functions to fit your needs with both For example:
menus and widgets. Access features by scrolling through the available on- • Swipe up or down on a home screen or menu to scroll it.
screen menus.
Panning
Manual terms Touch and hold an icon, and then tilt the device left or right.
For example:
Tap • Use panning to move icons from your home screens or application menus
Lightly touch the screen and release your finger. to other pages.
For example:
• Tap the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or other text. Command Keys
• Tap a menu item to select it.
• (Back): Return to the previous screen, option or step.
• Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
• (Home): Go to the main home screen
Touch and hold • (Recent): Show recently used apps.

Lightly touch and hold your finger to the screen. • Quick launch: A customizable key. See the next section for options.
For example:
• Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
• Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
1. Introduction 29
Add quick launch
Depending on authentication settings, a machine’s users may need to enter
an ID and password. If this is enabled, the machine can only be used by a
From the display screen, tap the Settings ( ) icon > Display > More
1 Settings > Quick Launch.
user with an authorized ID and password on the machine. Contact the
machine’s administrator.
Select the desired quick launch function.

2
• None: The icon is not shown.
Navigating the home screens
• Screen Capture ( ): Capture the current screen to an image file.
The machine initially has three home screens. You can place application icons on
• Applications ( ): Open a screen showing all apps. any page.
• Search ( ): Open the search screen.

From the main home screen, swipe left or right. The main home screen is
Tap (Back) to return to the settings menu. located in the center and three additional pages are located on each side.
3
18
Home screen overview Navigating the application menus
The main home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions. By default, this machine has several application menus available in the main
You can customize it with application icons, shortcuts, and widgets to give you home screen. If you want to access all application menus and widgets, tap the
instant access to information and applications. You can open the default page icon and swipe the screen left or right.
at any time by tapping the icon. The screen images in this user guide may
differ from your machine depending on its options or model.
From the main home screen, swipe left or right. The main home screen is
located in the center.
1. Introduction 30
Accessing recently-used apps Adding a shortcut from the home screen
Tap the icon to go to the main home screen.

You can easily find any app that you used recently. 1
Touch and hold the home screen to view a list of available shortcuts to
1 Tap the icon from anywhere to open the recently-used 2 select from.
applications window.
• Set wallpaper
Tap an application’s icon in this window to open it.
2 - Home Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen.
19
- Login Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen. To use
this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator .
Customizing your home screen
- Home and Login Screens : Set the wallpaper for both screens.
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator .
You can customize your home screen to suit your needs.
• Apps, XOA Apps, Widgets and Programs : Place apps, XOA apps,
widgets, and program icons on home screen.
Creating shortcuts • Folder : Create a folder on the home screen.
Shortcuts are different from widgets. While widgets can only launch • Page : Add another page to the home screen.
applications, shortcuts can do this and activate features and actions.
Adding a shortcut from the Apps menu

1
Tap the icon to view your current applications.
2
Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.
3
1. Introduction 31
4 Touch and hold the application icon. This creates a shortcut to the Adding a widget
application and shows the main home screen.
Drag the shortcut to a desired position on the screen and release it. To
1
5 move to a different page, drag the shortcut to the edge of the screen Tap the icon and tap the Widget tap at the top of the screen.
until the screen scrolls to the desired page.
2
Scroll through the list and locate your desired widget.
3
Deleting a shortcut Touch and hold the widget icon. This creates a copy of the widget and
4 opens the main home screen.
Touch and hold a shortcut until it becomes movable.
1
Drag the widget to the desired position on the screen and release it. To
2 You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash, both items turn 5 move the widget to a different page, drag it to the edge of the screen
red.
until the screen scrolls to the desired page.
This action does not uninstall a program, it only removes the shortcut from Removing a widget
the home screen.
Touch and hold a widget until it becomes movable.
1
You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash, both items turn
Adding and removing widgets 2 red.
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside on your widgets tab and on
any page of the home screen. Unlike shortcuts, a widget appears as an on-screen This action does not uninstall a widget, it only removes the copy from the
application. home screen.
1. Introduction 32
Moving icons in the Apps menu 3 Tap one of the following options in the next window that appears.
• Gallery: Select a wallpaper from photographs and images in the

Tap the icon to go to the main home screen. machine’s gallery.
1
Tap the icon to view your current applications.
2 You can select any images in a USB device or the 'BOX > Download' folder.
Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already selected.
3
• Live wallpapers: Select an animated image.
Drag the icon to a desired position on the screen and release it. To move
4 to a different page, drag the icon to the edge of the screen until the • Wallpapers: Select from several built-in stationary images.
screen scrolls to the desired page.
Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper, or Cancel.
4
Changing the Wallpaper
You can customize the Wallpaper (background) of your home screens.
From any home screen, touch and hold on an empty area of the screen,
1 and then select Set wallpaper option.
Tap one of the following options in the window that appears.

2
• Home Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen.
• Login Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen. To use this
feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator.
• Home and Login Screens : Set the wallpaper for both screens. To
use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator.
1. Introduction 33
20 21
Notification Bar Job Status
The notification bar includes a pull-down list to show information about When you tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps, the screen lists
currently running processes, toner status, screen brightness, and recent Current Job, Completed Job, Secure Print, Secure Fax and Active Notice.
notifications.
Current Job
Displays a list of jobs in progress and pending.
Completed Job
Displays a list of the completed jobs, including information about jobs in which
an error has occurred.
Secured Print / Fax

Displays a list of secured jobs. For secured print, you need to enter the ID and
Password set in the printer driver. For secured fax, you need to enter the
On the home screen, touch and hold the notification bar until the pull-down Password.
appears, and then drag down to expand it.
Active Notice
Displays any error messages and codes that have occurred.
1. Introduction 34
Command keys
22
Counter
You can check how many pages/jobs were printed, copied, scanned, and faxed- Button Name Description
out. You can check the counter by device or users. Quick Menu Open the quick menu.
Tap Counter from the home screen or Apps.
Search Search for a desired menu or app.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the Print You can print a usage counter report.
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information tab My Program Open a list of the apps you added.
> Usage Counters (see "Counter" on page 35).
All Period Select the period of checking counter.
From, To Set the period of checking counter.
Understanding the Counter menu

• Total Usage: Each category shows the usage count by job types ( Print,
Copy, Fax Print, Report, Total ).
- All : Tap and select
• Send Usage: Shows the count of Send ( Email, SMB, FTP, USB, PC, Others)
jobs.
• Fax Send Usage(PSTN): Shows the count of Fax Send Usage.

• User Usage (Login user only): Each category shows the printing usage by
user.
1. Introduction 35
Tap Help from the home screen or Apps.
To use User Usage, you may need to select to Application Authentication
1
The Help screen is displayed.
and Stanard Accounting Only from Settings > Admin Settings > Security
> Mode or Method on the home screen or Apps.
Select a topic and follow the built-in navigation.
2
23
Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu), and then
USB click on any option you want to know about.
To use the USB feature, tap Box > USB on the home screen or Apps.
25
To use this feature, you need to insert a USB Drive device into the USB port My Page
on your machine.
The My Page app allows you to easily change your profile information and
settings. Your My Page profile stores your contact information as well as your
24
personal settings. You can use these settings to personalize the machine to suit
your usage habits and accessibility needs.
Help
Help provides online information to help with your machine questions.
The Help app provides information about the menus and functions available in
the machine. Use the pane on the left side of the screen to navigate the Help
app. You can also select the headings below each section to browse the help
topics.
1. Introduction 36
To use this feature, tap My Page on the home screen or Apps.
Button Name Description
Change Allows you to change the password.

Password
Profile Image Allows you to choose an image for your profile.
Understanding the My Page menu

Allows you to modify various settings to make your experience using the
machine more enjoyable.
• Personalization
- Usage: The Frequency of Usage graph shows how many print, copy, fax,
send, or other jobs you have performed, while the quota information
Command keys
indicates how close you are to your usage quotas.
• Apps Settings
- +Me Setting: The +Me Setting setting specifies whether or not the
Quick Menu Open the quick menu. machine sends information about your usage to the Box or another
destination. You can also specify where your usage information is sent.
Search Search for a desired menu or app. - Send Feedback: The Send Feedback setting specifies whether or not
the machine sends information about your usage to the manufacturer.
My Program Open a list of the apps you added. Sending feedback helps the manufacturer improve the machine
through updates or patches.
Sub menu Open the sub menu.
(Action overflow)
1. Introduction 37
Understanding the pop-up keyboard
You can enter letters, numbers, or special symbols using the pop-up keyboard • ABC Mode( ): Tap this key to return the keyboard layout to the
on the display screen. This keyboard uses the standard QWERTY layout for ease
of use. default letter keys. Use the Shift key ( ) to toggle between lower-case
and upper-case letters.
When you touch an input area, the keyboard pops up on the screen. The
keyboard initially shows lowercase letters. • Space bar( ): Tap this key to enter a space.
• Shift key( ): Tap this key to enter one upper-case letter. Tap this key
twice to toggle caps-lock.
• Symbol/Numeric Mode( ): Tap this key to enter numbers, symbols,

and emoticons.
1. Introduction 38
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
26
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following Windows
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
1 powered on.
• The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches). 2
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
• For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation

3 window, and then click Next.
1. Introduction 39
Select USB on the Printer Connection Type screen, and then click Next.
4
27
Mac
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
5
1 powered on.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
2
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer
is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from
Samsung website, www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store. You need
have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not installed. If you 3
want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can download from the Samsung • For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
website, www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to install them Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
using the supplied software CD.
4
Click Continue.
5
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
1 on. 6 Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.

Make sure that the machine is powered on. 7
2
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable. 8
3 installed.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update. If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
1. Introduction 40
Enter the password and click OK (or Install Software). Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
9 1 powered on.
Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and
10 click Continue. Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
2
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
11 list.
3 package to.
Click Continue. Extract the package.

12 4
After the installation is finished, click Close. Move to uld folder.
13 5
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute
28
6 the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")

Linux
Proceed with installation.
7
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
When installation finished, launch printing utility(Go to System >
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > 8 Administration > Printing or execute "system-config-printer"
Support or Downloads).
command in Terminal program).
Click Add button.

Installing the Unified Linux Driver 9
Select your printer.
10
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you Click Forward button and add it to your system.
are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 11
1. Introduction 41
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
4 again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 39).
the driver.
29
Windows

1 powered on.
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
2 Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software. From the Windows 8 Start Screen
• For Windows 8,
1 From Charms, select Search > Apps.
1 powered on.
2 Search and click Control Panel.
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
3 Click Programs and Features. 2 screen.
4 Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
Follow the instructions in the window.
5 Follow the instructions in the window. 3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3 • If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, uninstall from the
desktop screen mode.
• If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
1. Introduction 42
Reinstalling the driver
30 31
Mac Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software Open Terminal program.
1 Uninstaller.
1
Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package.
To uninstall printer software, click Continue.
2
2 Execute "./uninstall.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root,
Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.
3 execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./uninstall.sh")
3
Enter the password and click OK. Proceed with uninstallation.
4 4
After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
5
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
1. Introduction 43
2. Media and Tray
This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine.
• Loading originals 45
• Selecting print media 49
• Loading paper in the tray 50
• Printing on special media 55
• Setting the paper size and type 59
• Selecting an output location 61
Loading originals
You can use the scanner glass or the dual scan document feeder (DSDF) to load Open the DSDF.
1
an original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
Preparing originals
• Do not load paper larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
2. Media and Tray 45

Loading originals
Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the
2 registration guide at the top left corner of the glass. • Leaving the DSDF open while copying may affect copy quality and toner
consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean.
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the DSDF until its
hinges are caught by the stopper, and then close the lid. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1 inch), start copying with the lid open.
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
• Do not put hands on the scanner glass while closing the DSDF. The DSDF
may fall on your hands and cause injury.
• Do not look at the light inside of the scanner while copying or scanning.
It is harmful to eyes.
Close the DSDF.

3

Loading originals
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
1
2
In the dual scan document feeder (DSDF) loading originals.
Preparing originals
• Do not load paper smaller than 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.8 inches) or larger
than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
Load the originals face up into the DSDF. Make sure that the bottom of
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper, in order to prevent
2 the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input
paper jam, low print quality, and machine damage. tray.
- Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- Coated paper
- Onion skin or thin paper
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other

unusual characteristics.
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (75 g/m2,
20 lb bond) for one job.

Loading originals
Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.
3
Dust on the DSDF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always keep
the glass clean.

Selecting print media
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels,
and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use • Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this user’s guide and
with your machine. still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the sheets
characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable temperature and
humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled.
3
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets

Guidelines for select the print media the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may
cause the following problems: • Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
• Poor print quality warranty or service agreements.
• Increased paper jams • The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media
type used (see "Print media specifications" on page 249).
• Premature wear on the machine.
• Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are cause damage to the machine.
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. • Using flammable print media can cause a fire.
When you choose print materials, consider the following: • Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page
249).
• The type, size, and weight of the print media for your machine are described
in print media specifications (see "Print media specifications" on page 249).
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project. The use of flammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead
to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper,
more vibrant images.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp
(see "Print media specifications" on page 249).
the printing looks on the paper.

Loading paper in the tray
Squeeze the paper width guide, and pull it to the end of the tray.
2
4
Tray 1 / optional tray
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into the standard
tray. The standard tray can hold a maximum of 550 sheets of plain paper (75 g/
m2, 20 lb bond).
You can purchase an optional tray (see "Available accessories" on page 235).
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems, that

require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service
agreements.
1 Paper width guide
Pull out the tray.

1 3 Squeeze the paper length guide, and pull it to the end of the tray.
1 Paper length guide

Flex and fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and
4 loading papers.
6 slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray.
Load the paper.

5
• Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
• Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or
the paper can be wrinkled.

• Do not overload the tray. Otherwise, it may cause paper jams. Make sure Insert the tray back into the machine.
that the paper is below the maximum paper capacity guide inside
7
thetray. When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray.
• See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59.
If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper
meets the media specification (see "Print media specifications" on page
249), and then try placing one sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray (see
"Printing on special media" on page 55).
Multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as
postcards, note cards, and envelopes.
• Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray

• Load only one type, size, and weight of print media at a time in the multi-
purpose tray.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print
1 Full media.
2 Empty • Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the
multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.

• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print Load the paper.
quality problems (see "Print media specifications" on page 249).
3
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the multi-purpose tray.
Open the multi-purpose tray and open the extension if necessary.

1
Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to
4 the width of the paper. Do not force too much, otherwise the paper will
bend resulting in a paper jam or skew.
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
2 loading originals.

When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multi-
5 purpose tray.
• See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59.

Printing on special media
The table below shows the available special media for each tray.
Types Tray 1 Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
Color ● ● ●
paper mismatch error.
Preprinted ● ● ●
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from SyncThru™ Web Service
click Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Input Tray (see "Settings Recycled ● ● ●
tab" on page 162). Envelope ● ● ●
Or, you can set it from the control panel. Labels ● ● ●
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab > CardStock ● ● ●
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
Bond ● ● ●
For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type.
Archive ● ● ●
LetterHead ● ● ●
When using special media, we recommend you feed a piece of paper at a
time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray (see "Print Punched ● ● ●
media specifications" on page 249).
(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
Types Tray 1 Optional tray Multi-purpose tray

The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type
Plain ● ● ● option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This
setting appears in the list so that you can select it. This will let you get the
Thick ● ● ●
best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
Thicker ●
Thin ● ● ●
Cotton ● ● ●

• Do not use stamped envelopes.
6
Envelope • Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
To print an envelope, place it flap side down with the stamp area on the top left
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
side.
corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6
• When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: inches) from the edges of the envelope.
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 • Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
(16 lb) otherwise, a jam may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than
6 mm (0.25 inches) curl, and should not contain air.
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or damaged.
- Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and
pressure of the machine during operation.
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.

- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
7
Labels indications of separation.
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.

Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
components.
machines.
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
• Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or damaged.
• Do not load paper that does not have space between labels running the
same direction as the paper is being fed. Otherwise, it could cause paper
jams.
• When selecting labels, consider the following factors:

- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s
fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second.
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5
inches) of curl in any direction.

8 9
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper Preprinted paper
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
• Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.8 inches) wide or 148 mm (5.8
inches) long.
• In the software application, set margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away
from the edges of the material. • Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
• Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely

affect machine rollers.
• Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink used is compatible with
Laser printers.

Setting the paper size and type
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
10
paper mismatch error. Tray Settings

To change the paper setting set in the machine, from SyncThru™ Web Service
click Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Input Tray (see "Settings To change detailed tray settings, tap Settings > Tray Settings and select the
tab" on page 162). tray and options you want on the display screen.
Or, you can set it from the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
display screen.
• Tray 1, MP Tray : You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
• Tray 2 : You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
• Paper Size: Allows you to change the paper size.

- You can change the paper list on the display screen. The paper lists are
divided into the available A/B type and letter type paper in this machine.

Setting the paper size and type
- If there is no required size paper or you need to use custom sized paper, • Tray Confirmation Message: When you load paper into a tray, you can set
tap the cardinal point arrows to set the paper size. You can also set and the confirmation message to appear automatically. This machine can detect
save the custom size using Custom Size. You can select the custom size some paper sizes and types automatically. If you want to set the paper size
whenever you need it. and type, or the machine cannot detect them, you can set the size and type
directly in the confirmation window.
• Paper Type: Allows you to change the paper type.
• Tray Protection: If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is excluded
during tray switching.
Options
Scroll through the options by swiping up and down. This setting works for copy or print jobs: It doesn't affect fax jobs.
• Auto Tray Switch: Determine whether or not the machine continues

• Tray Priority Settings: You can set the tray priority. If first setting is tray 1,
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For example, if both tray
the machine automatically prints from tray 1 after the second setting tray
1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper, the machine automatically
runs out of paper.
prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper.
• Auto Continue: This option allows you to continue printing when the paper
size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray. When this option
is activated, the machine continues printing using similar or large size paper.
If this option is inactivated, the machine waits until the required size paper
is loaded in the tray.
• Paper Substitution: When the requested paper for a print job is not
available in the tray, this feature allows you to substitute similar paper size,
For example, if the requested letter sized paper is not available in the tray,
this machine substitutes A4 for the requested paper.
When the paper is substituted, some image loss may occur.

Selecting an output location
The surface of the center tray may become hot if you print a large number
of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
The machine sends output to the output tray by default. The printed pages stack
on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to
align. Open the output support.
If paper coming out of the output try has problems, such as excessive curl,
try printing to the rear cover. The rear cover can only hold one piece of
paper at a time, do not let the papers stack on the rear cover.

3. Printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
• Printer driver features 63

• Basic printing 64
• Opening printing preferences 66
• Using special print features 74
• Using direct printing utility 82
• Changing the default print settings 84
• Setting your machine as a default machine 85
• Printing to a file (PRN) 86
• Mac printing 87
• Linux printing 89
• Unix printing 91
Printer driver features
PCL/PSa b/
• The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.
bc
PSb
Feature XPS
• Check the operating systems that are compatible with your machine (see
"System requirements" on page 253). Windows Mac Linux Unix
Fit to page printing ● ●
Your printer drivers support the following standard features: Reduce and enlarge ● ●
printing
• Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection
Different source for ● ●
• Number of copies first page
You can also use various special printing features. The following table shows a Cover page options ● ● ● ●
general overview of features supported by your printer drivers: Raster compression ●
(PCL only)
Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in Output options ● ● ● ●
the following table. Watermark ● ●
Overlay ●
(PCL only)
PCL/PSa b/ b
PS
Feature XPSbc Double-sided ● ● ● ●
printing (duplex)
Windows Mac Linux Unix
Machine quality ● ● ● ●
option a. The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript-based
applications such as Acrobat Reader®, Adobe Illustrator®, Adobe Photoshop®, etc.
Poster printing ● ● b. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com
> find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing, check whether your
Multiple pages per ● ● ● ● computer’s OS support the software.
c. XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher.
sheet
Booklet printing ● (●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
3. Printing 63
Basic printing
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
• Mac printing (see "Mac printing" on page 87).
3
• Linux printing (see "Linux printing" on page 89).
• UNIX printing (see "Unix printing" on page 91).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7. Your

Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system
or the application you are using.
Open the document you want to print.

1
Select Print from the File menu.
2
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,

click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to
change the print setting (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.

4
3. Printing 64
Basic printing
1
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
• You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( )
in the Windows task bar.
• You can cancel the print job with the Cancel Print from the computers’
Samsung Printer Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer
Status" on page 173).
3. Printing 65
Opening printing preferences
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning The screenshot may differ depending on model.
mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means you can select that
certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.

1
Select Print from the File menu.
2
Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.
3
Click Properties or Preferences.
4
• You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 168).
• You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 173).
3. Printing 66
2 3
Favorites tab Basic tab
Listed items help you choose pre-defined settings. Basic tab to set various printing options.
The screenshot may differ depending on model. Orientation

This option allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on
a page.
Layout Options
This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document.
• Single Page Per Side: This option is a basic layout option. This option allows
you to print a page on one side of a paper.
• Multiple Pages Per Side: See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 74.
• Poster Printing: See "Printing posters" on page 74.
• Booklet Printing: See "Printing booklets" on page 75.
• Page Border: This option allows you to print your document on which
border line is. This option is not available for Poster Printing and Booklet
Printing.
3. Printing 67
Double-Sided Printing Paper Options
This option allows you to print on both sides of paper (see "Printing on both • Original Size: This option allows you to set the actual paper size of the
sides of the paper" on page 76). originals.
• Output Size: This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected
4
paper size regardless of the originals size (see "Fitting your document to a
Paper tab selected paper size" on page 77).
- Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a page’s
Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications. contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a
percentage you want (see "Change the size by percentage of your
document" on page 77).
Copies • Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray. Use
MP Tray when printing on special materials, such as envelopes and
This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed. You can transparencies.
select 1 to 9999 copies.
• Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray.
This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality
may not be achieved.
• Specical Page: This option is allows you to make special pages such as
covers. You can add, delete or update the special page settings to the list.
This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
3. Printing 68
Toner Save
5
Graphics tab
The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing toner when printing a
Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing draft version of a document. Select Off to print in normal mode and select On to
needs. print with less toner applied to the page.
Quality
Advanced tab
The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics.
The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document. Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options.
Font/Text Watermark
Select Clear Text to print text darker than on a normal document. See "Using watermarks" on page 78.
Check All Text Black to print in solid black, regardless of the color it appears on
the screen. Overlay
See "Using overlay" on page 80.
Graphic Controller
It allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving
readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode.
3. Printing 69
Output options Job Accounting
• Print Order: This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages This option allows you to print with the given permission.
will print. Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages are available only when you
• User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission
use the PCL printer driver.
can start a print job.
• Skip Blank Pages: This option allows you to specify not to print blank pages
• Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group
in the original data.
permission can start a print job.
• Manual Margin: This option allows you to specify binding margin. Binding
margin adjusts binding position. This option is not available when you use the
PS printer driver. • Click the question mark( ) from the upper-right corner of the window
and click on any option you want to know about.
• Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in
If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to the default the control panel or SyncThru™ Web Service. For the detailed
setting. information about them, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Security
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects
the printing information to prevent your data from being comprised on your
network. Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the hard drive is
installed. The hard drive is used to decrypt the printing data.
3. Printing 70
Result Simulator
7
Eco tab
Result Simulator shows the result of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
The Eco tab allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
printing. When you select Eco Printing, you can see the eco image ( )on selected.
some options. Also, Some options are not available to use in the eco mode.
• The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the eco mode is
Eco Options disabled.
• Referred to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy and paper from
• Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the IEA(International Energy Agency), the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs
setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine. and Communication of Japan and www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each
• None: Disables this option. model has a different index.
• The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
• Eco Printing: Eco mode gets activated. Select Double-Sided Printing, power consumption in this machine.
Layout, and Skip Blank Pages you want to use in eco mode. As long as you
• The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the
do not change the options from the other tabs, the document will be
operating system used, computing performance, application software,
printed out as set in the eco mode. connection method, media type, media size, job complexity, etc.
• Passcode: If the administrator sets On-Forced in Default Eco Mode for this
machine, the eco mode is always set by this machine’s eco setting, while the
Eco Options in the printer driver are disabled. If you need to change the
print settings, click Passcode and enter the password or contact your
administrator.
3. Printing 71
• Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If
8
Samsung tab you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the mass
storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue,
decreasing the computer’s work load.
Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the
driver. If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can have access to • Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.
services.
• Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using
9
the control panel.

Print Mode • User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the
control panel. The user name automatically appears as the user name
that you use to log on Windows.
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using
• Enter Password: If the Property of the stored documents you selected
the HDD in your machine. The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
is Secured, you have to enter the password for the stored document.
printing without storing the printing file on the HDD. You can also use this This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel.
option in other tabs.
• Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it.
• Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional
memory.
• Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can
print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
• Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You

need to enter a password to print.
• Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device
without printing.
• Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at
the same time.
3. Printing 72
10
Using a favorite setting To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected.To delete saved
settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Favorites tab and Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for
future use.
11
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:

Using help
Change the settings as needed on each tab.

1 Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
2
Click Save.
3
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
4
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
5
3. Printing 73
Using special print features
Special print features include: To change the print settings from your software application, access
1 Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
• "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 74.
Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type drop-
• "Printing posters" on page 74. 2 down list.
• "Printing booklets" on page 75.
Select Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet.
• "Printing on both sides of the paper" on page 76. 3
• "Change the size by percentage of your document" on page 77. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16)
4 in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
• "Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 77.
• "Using watermarks" on page 78. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
5
• "Using overlay" on page 80.
Click the Paper tab, select the Original size, Source, and Type.
6
12
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.

7
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
13
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print Printing posters
more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in
the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets
of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size
document.
3. Printing 74
To change the print settings from your software application, access
1
14
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). Printing booklets
Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
2 This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the
Select the page layout you want. pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.
3
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters
4 or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to
make it easier to paste the sheets together.
To change the print settings from your software application, access the
Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down
2 list.
5
Click the Advanced button. Then select the option you want.
6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 3
7 You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. 4
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to
find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper
size in the Original size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically
canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark).

5
3. Printing 75
• Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
15
Printing on both sides of the paper bookbinding.
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you
want your document oriented.
• Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.

Do not print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or
thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or
damage the machine.

1 Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66). • Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the
print order when duplex printing.
Click the Basic tab.
2 Click the Paper tab, select the Original size, Source, and Type.
4
From the Double-Sided Printing section, select the binding option you
3 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
want. 5
• Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined
by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine. This
option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
• None: Disables this feature.
3. Printing 76
16 17
Change the size by percentage of your document Fitting your document to a selected paper size
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size
printed page by typing in a percentage you want. regardless of the document size. This option can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.

Click the Paper tab.

2 1 To change the print settings from your software application, access
Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size. Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
3
Click the Paper tab.
4 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. 2
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size.
3
Select the size of paper to be printed in the tray from the Output Size.
You cannot use this feature when you select a size of paper from the Output 4
Size. Select the Source and Type.
5
Select the Source and Type. 6
5
6
3. Printing 77
Using an existing watermark
18
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For
example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT”
Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the
or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a 2 Watermark drop-down list.
document.
• Watermark Message: Allows users to enter the watermark which is the

user want to print.
• Image file: Allows users to load the watermark image which is the user
want to print.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can • Watermark name: Allows users to enter the watermark name for adding
to watermark drop-down list.
be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
• First Page Only: Prints watermark only on the first page. Not checked by
default.
• Header: You can add the selected text to the Top left, Top center, or Top
right.
Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.
• Footer: You can add the selected text to the Bottom left, Bottom center, 3
or Bottom right.
Creating a watermark

From the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down
2 list.
3. Printing 78
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up Click Update to save the changes.
3 to 256 characters.
4
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the 5
first page only.
Select watermark options.

Deleting a watermark
4
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font
Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the 1 Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
Watermark Alignment and Angle section.
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down
5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list. 2 list.
When you finish editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print
6 window. 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks
list and click Delete.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down
list. 4
Editing a watermark

Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down
2 list.
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list
3 and change the watermark message and options.
3. Printing 79
Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new
1
19
Using overlay page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear
when printed as an overlay.
This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences (see
2 "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
What is an overlay? Click the Advanced tab, and select Create from the Overlay drop-down
3 list.
An overlay is text and/or images stored on the computer hard drive (HDD) as a
special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File
to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead,
4 name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is
you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is C:\Formover).
currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead,
Click Save.
you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print 5
the letterhead overlay on your document.
6
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk
7 drive.
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print
Creating a new page overlay with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo
or image.
3. Printing 80
Using a page overlay 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document.
To print an overlay with a document:
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the
Create or open the document you want to print. document you will print with the overlay.
1
Deleting a page overlay
Click the Advanced tab.
3 You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
Select the Print Overlay from the Overlay drop-down list.
4 In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay File 1 or
1
5 Overlay File 2 drop-down list, select Load from the Overlay List. Select Select the Print Overlay from the Overlay drop-down list.
the overlay file you want to use.
2
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, 3
you can also load the file when you access the Load window. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay List, select
Load from the Overlay List. Select the overlay file you want to delete.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List
box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List
Click Delete.
box. 4
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
6 If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this 5
box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an 6
overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay
automatically prints with your document.
3. Printing 81
Using direct printing utility
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without
21
open the files. Printing
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
restriction feature and retry printing.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing. From the Direct Printing Utility window
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs.
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
1
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below. • For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Apps.
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.
Find Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility.
2
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
3
20
What is Direct Printing Utility? Browse.
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.

Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your machine 4
to print without having to open the file. It sends data through the Windows The file is added in the Select Files section.
spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF format.
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
To install this program:
5
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: 6
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
3. Printing 82
Using direct printing utility
22
Using the right-click menu
Right-click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing.
1
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
Select the machine you wish to use.

2
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
3
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
4
3. Printing 83
Changing the default print settings
Change the settings on each tab.
Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer
5
Click OK.
driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first,
and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.
6
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
Click the Windows Start menu.
1
• For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.

2
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
Right-click on your machine.

3
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing
4 Preferences.
For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences has a ►, you can select other printer drivers

connected to the selected printer.
3. Printing 84
Setting your machine as a default machine
1
• For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.

2
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Select your machine.

3
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
4
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
►, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer.
3. Printing 85
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
To create a file:
Documents, Documents and Settings or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
Check the Print to file box at the Print window. using.
1
Click Print.
2
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
3
For example c:\Temp\file name.
3. Printing 86
Mac printing
24
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It Changing printer settings
means that the features are not supported.
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
23 Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
Printing a document
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
25
Open the document to print.

Printing multiple pages on one sheet
1
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
2 applications). provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
3 sure that your machine is selected. Click OK. 1 Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
4 Open the File menu and click Print. 2 per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
5
Select the other options to use.
6 Click Print. 3
Click Print.
4
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
3. Printing 87
Mac printing
26
Printing on both sides of the paper If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It

means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page
27
10).
Using help
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
• Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
binding.
• Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
1
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
2
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.
3
Select the other options to use.
4
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
5
3. Printing 88
Linux printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
means that the features are not supported. models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by model" on page 8).
28
29
Printing from applications

Printing files
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standardCUPS
application. directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows you to
do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
1 "lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
2 someapplications).
30
Choose your paper size, orientation, and makesure that your machine is
3 selected. Click Apply.
Configuring Printer Properties
Open the File menu and click Print. You can change the default printing options or connection type with Printing
4 utility supplied by o/s.
Select your machine to print.
5
Launch Printing utility(Go to System > Administration > Printing
6 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print. 1 menu or execute "system-config-printer" command in Terminal
program).
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
7
Select your printer and double-click it.
8 Click Print. 2
3. Printing 89
Linux printing
Change default printing options or connection type.
3
Click Apply button.
4
3. Printing 90
Unix printing
Press OK to start the print job.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
5
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by model" on 32
page 8).
Changing the machine settings
31 The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
print options in printer Properties.
Proceeding the print job
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print. and “C” for Cancel.
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.

1 General tab
For example, if you are printing “document1”
• Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
printui document1
to your requirements.
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options. • Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
Select a printer that has been already added.
2 • Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Selection.
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
3 • Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
4 • Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,

press Properties.
3. Printing 91
Unix printing
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
applications for odd-even printing.
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
• Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
• Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
• Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
• Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
3. Printing 92
4. Copying
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.
• Understanding the copy screen 94

• Basic copying 103
• Quick copying 104
• ID card copying 105
Understanding the copy screen
When you tap Copy from the home screen or Apps , the Copy screen appears. Virtual Hard Key
This screen has several tabs and many copying options. All the options are
grouped by feature so you can configure your selections easily. If want to go
home, tap the home( ) button. • The positon of virtual hard keys is fixed on the right side of screen.
• When an app is launched, the virtual hard keys are shown.
• If the screen is touched, the virtual hard keys always appear.
Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and then
• If the , touched, the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown.
click on any option you want to know about.

1
Reset Reset the current machine’s configuration.

Command keys
Interrupt Suspend the current job, allowing for urgent copying.

Stop Stop a job at any time. A popup window appears to
Quick Menu Open the quick menus. show the jobs that you can stop.
Start Start a job.

My Program Add an app to my program list.

(Action overflow)
Set the number of copies printed.

,
4. Copying 94
2

Copy tab
Preview for Shows the job preview.
status
Preview for Scans for job.

play
Preview edit Preview edit mode appears when you tap the
mode play( ) button in the preview pane. Adjust the
prescanned image with operation functions such
as rotate and crop.
Some features are not available to

preview edit mode.
Start Starts a job.
Preview
Changing Darkness
Display the originals type.
You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the
original contains faint markings or dark images. Adjust the darkness level using
the control bar. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter, or light
Setting View changed options list. images darker.
History
4. Copying 95
• Proof Copy: Allows you to print a test copy to check the quality and
Tap Darkness ( ) to show the slider control. alignment of the printout. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to
print a proof copy. After ensuring that the copy is perfect, tap the Start
button to print the rest of the copies.
• ID Copy: Allows you to copy both sides of a two-sided original onto one
sheet of paper. This feature is helpful for copying originals with important
Selecting the type of originals information on both sides, such as driver's licenses.
• Save to Box: Allows you to save scanned originals to the hard disk drive in
Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the
the machine. You can then print these saved documents at a later date or
appropriate document type for a copy job.
store them as printable files. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to
• Text : Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images. save a document to the hard disk drive in the machine.
• Text/Photo : Use if the original is a mix of text and images. • Save as Default: Allows you to save the current copy options as the default
copy settings. After you save the default copy settings, all future copy tasks
• Photo : Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
use these settings. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the
current settings as the default settings.
Sub menu (Action overflow) • Restore Default: Allows you to restore the copy settings to the default
settings of the machine. This option changes the current copy settings to
the original copy settings configured at the factory. Tap the Restore Default
• Eco: When Eco mode is enabled, you can select only economical printing
option in this menu to restore the default settings.
settings. Tap the Eco option in the Action Overflow menu to turn Eco mode
on or off. • Copy Settings: The Another Page Confirmation option specifies whether
the machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after
• Add to My Program: Add an app to my program list.
each page. Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single
• Build Job: This option can be turned on or off. When this option is on:After copy job.
the scanning is finished, the Scan More window appears to ask if you want
to scan another page. If you select Yes, then you can scan another page in
the current job. If you select No, then the scanning process is completed and
the remainder of the job is performed.
4. Copying 96
Setting options
• Another Page Confirmation: This option specifies whether the
machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after each
The Copy tab provides two sections. The More tab provides additional sections.
page. Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single copy
job.
• You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option
• UI Configuration: Allows you to select the options that appear in the Copy (Send > Sub menu(action overflow) > UI Configuration).
menu. Tap the + or - symbol on the menu icons to add or remove menus.
You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or • Some menus are disabled. If so, it is not available to your machine.
tap Clear All to remove all the menus. • (Help) app explains the normal and usual procedure for copying
originals. Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick

Job progress menu) and then click on any option you want to know about.
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job.
• Detail : Tap this button to see the status, type, and time of the job. Paper Source
• Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied.
The paper source option sets the tray for this print job. The machine prints the
The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings, such as
scanned image on the paper in the selected tray. You can see icons that
the orientation and size of the printout.
represent paper sizes and the amount of paper remaining in each tray.
• Send Feedback : Allows you to send feedback about the current send job.
If you want to receive sending job by email, you can set from My page app
(see "Understanding the My Page menu" on page 37). Duplex
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper.
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in"
on page 280).
4. Copying 97
You can select the Original and Output binding type, either type is Book or Sets the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of a 3
Calendar. page original, one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second
complete document.
• 1 Sided: For originals or output binding type that are printed on one side
only. • Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
• 2 Sided, Book: For originals or output binding type that are printed on both
sides.
• 2 Sided, Calendar : For originals or output binding type that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Reduce/Enlarge • Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
The reduce/enlarge feature allows you print an image larger or smaller than the
original. Tap the icons on the screen to reduce a copy by 25 % to 99 %, or enlarge
a copy by 101 % to 400 %.
• 100% (Original): Prints the copy at the same size as the original.
• Auto: Reduces or enlarges the copy based on the size of the output paper.
• Custom: You can set custom percentage(between25 to 400%). Original Size

• XY Custom: You can set XY custom values(between 25 to 400%). Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals.
• Other preset values: Reduces or enlarges the copy to a preset value. The • Mixed Size: If the original uses a combination of both Letter and Legal-size
icons on the right side of the column indicate the presets to use when paper, the machine can use the proper-sized paper for each sheet from
copying to a different paper size. multiple trays. For example, if the original is 3 pages, two Letter and one
Legal, the machine prints in order on the correct paper size for each page.
• Custom size: If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper,
Finishing
use the arrows to set the required size.
You can set the print output options.
4. Copying 98
• Orientation: You can select the direction in which information is copied on
Original Orientation
a page.
Use this option to set the orientation of the original.
• Upright Images: Use this setting for an original document loaded with the Booklet
top toward the back of the machine.
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which are
• Sideways Images: Use this setting for an original document loaded into the then folded to produce a booklet with all pages in the correct sequence. The
DSDF with the top of the document toward the left side of the machine, or machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on
an original document placed on the scanner glass with the top of the the selected paper.
document toward the right side of the machine.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• 1 Sided Originals: Copy one side of the original to one sheet of a booklet.
Original type
• 2 Sided Originals, Book: Copy each side of an original to one sheet of a
Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document
booklet.
type for the current job.
• 2 Sided Originals, Calendar: Copy each side of an original to one page of a
• Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images. booklet. The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text
• Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images. will be upright in the booklet.
• Photo: Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.

Book Copy
N-up Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the DSDF until its
hinges are engaged by the stopper, then close the DSDF. If the book or
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 -16 pages onto one sheet of
magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the DSDF open.
paper.
• Off: Disable this feature.

• N-Up: Copies the specified number of pages from the original onto one
sheet of paper.
4. Copying 99
Image Repeat
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass. This option prints several copies of the original image on the same side of a
single page. If you have other original in the DSDF, all other original images get
printed the same way.
• Left Page: Prints only the left page of the book.
• Auto Repeat: The number of images is automatically determined by the
• Right Page: Prints only the right page of the book.
original image and paper size. The number of repeating images is
• Both Pages(From Left): Prints both facing pages from the left page. automatically selected based on size of the original, the size of output page,
and the reduce/enlarge percentage by up to 100 %.
• Both Pages(From Right): Prints both facing pages from a right page.
• Manual Repeat: Manually select the number of images from 2, 4, 6, 8, 9 or
• Book Center & Edge Erase: Erases shadows caused by bindings or book
16.
edges from the center and side edges of copies.
• Duplex: Erases shadows caused by bindings or book edges from the center
nd side edges of copies. Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For
example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “Draft” or
Poster Copy
“Confidential” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets document.
of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size
document.
Stamp
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass. You cannot apply stamps to booklets or posters.
4. Copying 100
Prints the IP Address, ID, Device Information, Comment, Page Number or
Image Shift
Date & Time on printouts. You can set the Text Size, Opacity or Position of the
stamp. To prevent images from overlapping with punch holes, staples, and other marks,
you can move an image’s position.

Overlay
• Auto Center: Automatically position at the center of the paper.
An overlay is text and/or images stored on a computer hard drive (HDD) in a
special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays can take the • Custom Shift: Adjust the margins of the paper as needed.
place of traditional letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead,
you can create an overlay matching the layout of the letterhead. To print a letter
on your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead in
Covers
the machine, just enable the letterhead overlay on your document. The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken
from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main
body of the job.
• + New: Create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
• Overlap: Select an overlap location.
• Front: Print the document with a front cover.
• Back: Print the document with a back cover.
Erase Edge
• Front & Back: Prints the document with a front and back cover.
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.
• Cover Sheet: Sets the option for double-sided copying.
• Paper Source: Selects the default paper tray to use.
• Border Erase: Erase an equal amount of edges from all copies.
• Hole Punch Erase: Erase hole-punch marks from the left edge of copies.
Image Adjustment
This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness, Sharpness,
Contrast and Negative Image.
4. Copying 101
Background Adjustment
This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the
background, such as newspapers or catalogs. You can use the options in this
menu to make the copies easier to read.
• Background Density: Allows you to adjust the density of the background

in the scanned image. This feature is useful when scanning originals that
have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background.
• Backside Image: Allows you to erase any text or images that show through
from the other side of the original. You can use this feature to ensure that
your scanned output is clearly legible.
Mirror Image
This option allows you to reverse the original document like a mirror.
4. Copying 102
Basic copying
This is the usual procedure to copy your original documents.
Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps.

1
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
2 down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 45).
Adjust the settings on the Copy tab and More tab.

3
Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad (or +, -
4 button) on the control panel, if necessary.
Tap , (Start ) from the control panel to begin

5 copying.
To cancel the current copy job, tap (Stop)> tap Job Status on the
control panel. Then delete the job you want (see "Job Status" on page 34).
4. Copying 103
Quick copying
The Quick Copy menu allows you to quickly set common copy options without
having to open a lower level menu or another tab. However, this menu does not
offer every copy option available.
Tap Quick Copy from the home screen or Apps.

1
on page 45).
Adjust the settings (Paper Source, Reduce/Enlarge, Original

3 Orientation, Darkness, Duplex, N-UP, Collation).
Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad (or +, -

4 button) on the control panel, if necessary.
Tap Start( ) on the control panel to begin copying.

5
To cancel the current copy job, tap (Stop)> tap Job Status on the
control panel. Then delete the job you want (see "Job Status" on page 34).
4. Copying 104
ID card copying
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
3 where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
Tap ID Copy from the home screen or Apps.

1
If necessary, adjust the settings for each copy such as Print Layout,
2 Original Size, Paper Source, Adjust to Paper Size, and Align. Tap .
4
Follow the instructions on the control panel. Your machine begins scanning the front side.
4. Copying 105
ID card copying
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
5 indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Tap .
6
Your machine begins scanning the back side.
• If you do not press the button, only the front side will be
copied.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
4. Copying 106
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.
• Understanding the Scan & Send screen 108

• Basic scan 116
• Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software 117
• Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 118
• Mac scanning 120
• Linux scanning 121
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
This section describes all scanning and fax functions. When you tap Scan & Send Command keys
from the home screen or Apps, the Scan & Send screen appears. This screen has
2 tabs and many options. All options are grouped by feature so that you can
configure the job easily. If want to go home, tap the home( ) button. Button Name Description
Quick Menu Open the quick menu.
Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and then Address book Open your saved address book.
click on any option you want to know about.
Fax Send a fax.
1 My Program Add an app to my program list.
Send tab Sub menu Open the sub menu.

(Action overflow)
5. Scan & Send(Scanning) 108

+ Me When users are logged in, the destination
Reset Reset to app default configuration.
configured in their My Page profile appears.You
can set the destination in the Send to
Destination menu of the My Page app (see On Hook When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone.
"Understanding the My Page menu" on page 37). Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call
Administrators can also set the default using speaker phone.
destination in the sub menu (Action overflow) > Stop Stop a job at any time. A popup window appears to
Send Settings > +Me Setting. show the jobs that you can stop.
Start Start a job.

You must log in to use your + Me
destination. If you do not log in, then the
machine sends the copy to the + Me
destination specified by the Preview
administrator.
Preview displays the original scanned image.
Virtual Hard Key Button Name Description
Setting View changed options list.

History
• The positon of virtual hard keys is fixed on the right side of screen.
status

Button Name Description Selecting the color mode
Preview for Scans for job. Use one of the following options to use for the scan.
play
• Mono: Use black and white (1-bit per pixel).
: This button appears to edit when • Gray : Use grayscale (8-bit per pixel).
scanning. Adjust the prescanned image • Color : Use color (24-bit per pixel, each of the RGB channels has 8 bits).
with operation functions such as rotate
and crop.
Selecting the original type
Start Starts a job.
• Text : Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
Adjusting the brightness
• Text/Photo : Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the • Photo : Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
original contains faint markings or dark images. Adjust the brightness level
using the slider. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter, or light
images darker. Sub menu (Action overflow)
Tap Darkness to show the slider control. • Add to my program : Add an app to my program list. With this feature, user
can set default settings, destinations required for each program. Also can set
default options as Auto Launch, add shortcut to Home.
• Search : Search for a desired options.

• Build Job : This option can be turned on or off. When this option is on:After
the scanning is finished, the Scan More window appears to ask if you want If the report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support,
to scan another page. If you select Yes, then you can scan another page in then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters/fonts.
- +Me Setting: Allows you to select the default destination for the send
• Attach File Only : Allows you to attach a file to your message. You can use job. When logged in, you can select your any Send destination as the
this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive (BOX) default send destination. Same will appear in Scan & Send widgets too.
of the machine to an SMB, FTP, Email, Box, USB. - Send to PC: Scans and sends scanned output to a computer.
• Save as Default : Allows you to save the current Scan & Send settings as the • Address Book Settings: This address book contains contacts that are
default Scan & Send settings. After you save the default Scan & Send available to all users. You can use the address book to make contacts
settings, all future send tasks use these settings. Tap this option in the Action available to anyone who uses the machine.
Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan & Send
settings. - Google Address Book: This address book contains the contacts
registered in your Google contacts list. You must log into your Google
• Restore Default : Allows you to restore the Scan & Send settings to the account to access your Google Address Book.
default Scan & Send settings of the machine. This option changes the
current Scan & Send settings to the original settings configured at the • UI Configuration: Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan
factory. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default & Send menu. Tap the + or - symbol on the menu icons to add or remove
Scan & Send settings. menus. You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different
position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus.
• Send Settings : Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a
destination. The scanned document is sent as an image file. Tap this option
in the sub menu (action overflow menu) to scan and attach a file to the
current message.
- Filing Policy: The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine
handles name conflicts when saving files.
- Print Confirmation Report: You can use this feature to get
confirmation on executed Scan & Send destination's successfully or
not.

Job progress • Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job. • Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and
• Detail : Tap this button to see the status, destination, sender, and time of the then click on any option you want to know about.
job.
• Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being sent. The
image in the preview area indicates the current send settings, such as the Add Destination
orientation and size of the file.
Tap to add a recipient’s email address or a fax number. If you want to send
to SMB, FTP, Box, PC, or USB click on respective buttons.
(see "Understanding the My Page menu" on page 37).
Original
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in" This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type
on page 280). for the current scan job.
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
• 2 Sided, Book: For originals that are printed on both sides.

Setting options • 2 Sided, Calendar : For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back
is rotated 180 degrees.
You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab.
To use 2 Sided, Book and 2 Sided, Calendar, load the originals on the
DSDF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DSDF, it
(Send > Sub menu(action overflow) > UI Configuration). automatically changes to 1 Sided.
• Some menus are disabled. If so, it is not available to your machine.

Scan Options - Ultra Fine: Recommended for originals containing extremely fine
details. This option is only available if the receiving machine also
Set file options of the scanned output.
supports Ultra Fine resolution.
• File Name: Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination.
• File Format: Select a file format for the scanned output. Book Scan
• PDF Options: Set PDF file options for the scanned out. Use this feature to scan a book. If the book is too thick, lift the DSDF until its
• Resolution: Adjust the document resolution. The higher this value, the hinges are engaged by the stopper, then close the DSDF. If the book or
clearer the result, but scan time may take longer. magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the DSDF open.
• Quality: Use this option to produce a high quality document. The higher • Off: Disable this feature.
quality you select, the larger file size. • Left Page: Scans only the left page of the book.
• OCR Language: When producing scanned output for OCR software, select • Right Page: Scans only the right page of the book.
the appropriate language.
• Both Pages(From Left): Scans both facing pages from the left page.
Fax Options • Both Pages(From Right): Scans both facing pages from the right page.
If you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can • Book Center & Edge Erase: You can set shaded areas to erase shadows
adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax. caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies.
• Resolution
- Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will Advanced Fax (fax user only)
reduce the transmission time. Set the sending options for fax, such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send.
- Fine: Recommended for the originals containing small characters, thin
lines, or text from a dot-matrix printer.
- Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing fine details. This • Quick Start Fax: The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after the
option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super first page has been scanned. Originals with many pages can be sent this way
Fine resolution. without overflowing the machine’s memory.

• Delay Send: Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time. Define the
Job Name and Start Time.
Original Size
Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals.
You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours • Mixed Size: Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a
after the scan. combination of different paper types.
• Custom size: If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper, use
the arrows to set the required size.
Email Settings
Set email information, such as From, Subject and Message. Original Orientation
Original Type • Upright Images: The original is in landscape orientation. The images or text
Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page.
type for the current job. • Sideways Images: The original is in portrait orientation. The images or text
• Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images. in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page.
• Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.

Color Mode
Use this option to set the default color mode used for copy jobs.
• Mono: Displays an image in black and white.
• Gray: Displays an image in gray.
• Color: Displays an image in color.

The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if Mono
has been selected for Color Mode. This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the
Image Adjustment • Background Density: Allows you to adjust the density of the background
in the scanned image. This feature is useful when scanning originals that
This option allows you to manually adjust the image. have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background.
• Darkness: Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file. This • Backside Image: Allows you to erase any text or images that show through
feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little from the other side of the original. You can use this feature to ensure that
contrast. your scanned output is clearly legible.
• Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read.
You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images.
• Contrast: allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output
crisper or smoother. You can use this feature to improve the quality of an
image or increase the readability of text.

Basic scan
This is the usual procedure to scan your original documents.
Tap Scan & Send from the home screen or Apps.

1
on page 45).
Adjust the settings in the Send tab and More tab.

3
Select a destination using (Add Destination), + Me, (Address
4 book), Email , SMB, FTP, Box, or USB).
You can send scanned documents to Email, Fax, FTP, or SMB addresses
through the (Address book). The Email, Fax, FTP, or SMB icons appear
next to the contact's name in the Address book. When you select a name,
the first icon is selected by default. To send documents to multiple
destinations, select the icons for each of the destinations.
Tap , (Start) from the control panel to begin scan.

5
To cancel the current send job, tap (Stop), then tap Job Status on the
control panel, and then delete the job you want (see "Job Status" on page
34).

Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
If you want to scan documents using other software, you need to use TWAIN-
compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.
Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:

1 powered on.
on page 45).
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.

3
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
4
Scan and save your scanned images.
5

Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats (including .epub). These documents
Click (Help) in the upper-right corner of the window, then click on any
can be shared over social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a student
option you want to know more about.
organizing research from a library or a stay-at-home parent sharing scanned
pictures from last year’s birthday party, Easy Document Creator will provide you
with the necessary tools. 2
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator

• Available for Windows OS only.
• Requires Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher. Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
install the machine software.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
1 documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides the following features:
page 45).
• Image Scanning: Use to scan single or multiple pictures.
From the Windows Start menu, click Programs or All Programs.
• Document Scanning: Use to scan documents with text or text andimages. 2
• Text Converting: Use to scan documents that need to be saved in an Click Samsung Printers, and run Samsung Easy Document Creator.
editable text format.
3
Click Scan from the home screen.
• Book Scanning: Use to scan books with the flatbed scanner. 4
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.
• SNS Upload: Use to quickly and easily upload scanned images or existing
images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
5
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).
• E-Book Conversion: Use to scan multiple documents together as one e- 6
book or combine existing files into an e-book. Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview.
7
• Plug-in: Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program.
Select Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS.
8
Click Save (to save the scanned image), Send (to email the scanned
9 image), or Share (to upload the scanned image).
If there is room on the scanning glass, you can scan more than one item at
a time. Use the tool to define multiple selection areas.

Mac scanning
3 4
Scanning from USB connected machine Scanning from network connected machine
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
1 powered on.
1
2 documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on page 45).
page 45).
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
3 4 According to OS, follow steps below.
• For 10.5
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the - Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
- Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
Capture’s help. machine in Bonjour Devices.
• For 10.6 -10.9, select your device below SHARED.
Select the option you want.
4 Set the scan options on this program.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
5 6 Scan and save your scanned image.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest • If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest version.
version.
• For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.
• You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the Applications folder >
Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant.

Linux scanning
5
Scanning

1 powered on.
Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple-scan(If it's not

2 installed, please install it manually to use scan features. For example, you
may use "yum install xsane" for rpm package systems and "apt-get install
xsane" for deb package systems to install xsane).
Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply.
3
Click the Scan button.
4

6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
This guide gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
• Preparing to fax 123

• Using a fax in your computer 124
• Understanding the fax screen 126
• Sending a fax 135
• Receiving a fax 137
Preparing to fax
• You cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone. For
more information, ask your internet service provider.
• We recommend you use traditional analog phone services like PSTN
(public switched telephone network) when using a phone line as a fax
line. If you use internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the
connection quality by using a micro-filter. A micro-filter reduces noise
and improves connection quality. Since a DSL micro-filter is not provided
with the machine, contact your internet service provider.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
Before you send or receive a fax, you must connect the supplied cord to the wall
jack. Refer to “Quick installation guide”. The method of connecting a telephone
line varies by country.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing) 123

Using a fax in your computer
You can send a fax directly from your computer. Make sure that your machine
2
and the computer are connected to the same network. Checking a sent fax list (Windows)
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.

Sending a fax (Windows) From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers >
Network PC Fax > Fax Transmission History. Then, the Fax Journal appears
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program with the fax list you have sent.
must be installed. You can install the Samsung Network PC Fax driver from the
software CD. You can select the Samsung Network PC Fax driver in the Select
Software window. For more information about Fax Transmission History, click Help.
Open the document you want to send.

1 3
2 Select Print from the File menu. Sending a fax (Mac)

The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application. To send a fax from your computer, the Fax Utilities program must be installed.
This program is installed when you install the printer driver.
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
3 The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6. Depending on the
Click Print or OK. OS version, the following steps may be different. Before sending a fax, add a fax
4 driver using Fax Queue Creator.
Enter the recipient’s fax number and set any options if necessary.
5
Open the document you want to send.
1
For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click Help. Select Print from the File menu.
2
Select a fax driver from the Printer list.
6 Click Send. 3

Using a fax in your computer
Choose the number of copies and pages.
4
Choose your paper size, orientation, and scale.
5
Enter the recipients’ fax number in To input box. If you have stored
6 frequently-used fax numbers, you can also use Addresses by pressing
the button.
If necessary, enter the access code in Dialing Prefix.

7
If necessary, check Use Cover page to send the fax with a cover page.
8
Enter the subject and message of the fax job.
9
Click Fax.
10
The Fax Queue icon ( ) appears on your Mac dock. Click the icon to
11 see the status of the fax job. You can also delete, hold, pause and resume
jobs from this window.

Understanding the fax screen
Tap Scan & Send from the home screen or Apps, then tap to open the Fax Command keys
screen. If you see a different screen, tap the icon to go to the home screen.
• Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and Quick Menu Open the quick menu.
then click on any option you want to know about.

Address book Open your saved address book.
• You can set the general options (see "Setting options" on page 112).
Fax Send a fax.
My Program Add an app to my program list.

Send tab
(Action overflow)

+ Me When users are logged in, the destination
Reset Reset to app default configuration.
configured in their My Page profile appears.You
can set the destination in the Send to
Destination menu of the My Page app (see On Hook When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone.
"Understanding the My Page menu" on page 37). Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call
Administrators can also set the default using speaker phone.
destination in the sub menu (Action overflow) > Stop Stop a job at any time. A popup window appears to
Send Settings > +Me Setting. show the jobs that you can stop.
Start Start a job.

You must log in to use your + Me
destination. If you do not log in, then the
machine sends the copy to the + Me
destination specified by the Preview
administrator.
Preview displays the original scanned image.
Virtual Hard Key Button Name Description
Setting View changed options list.

History
• The positon of virtual hard keys is fixed on the right side of screen.
status

Button Name Description Selecting the color mode
Preview for Scans for job. Use one of the following options to use for the scan.
play
• Mono: Use black and white (1-bit per pixel).
: This button appears to edit when • Gray : Use grayscale (8-bit per pixel).
scanning. Adjust the prescanned image • Color : Use color (24-bit per pixel, each of the RGB channels has 8 bits).
with operation functions such as rotate
and crop.
Selecting the original type
Start Starts a job.
• Text : Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
Adjusting the brightness
• Text/Photo : Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the • Photo : Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
original contains faint markings or dark images. Adjust the brightness level
using the slider. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter, or light
images darker. Sub menu (Action overflow)
Tap Darkness to show the slider control. • Add to my program : Add an app to my program list. With this feature, user
can set default settings, destinations required for each program. Also can set
default options as Auto Launch, add shortcut to Home.
• Search : Search for a desired options.

• Build Job : This option can be turned on or off. When this option is on:After
the scanning is finished, the Scan More window appears to ask if you want If the report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support,
to scan another page. If you select Yes, then you can scan another page in then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters/fonts.
- +Me Setting: Allows you to select the default destination for the send
• Attach File Only : Allows you to attach a file to your message. You can use job. When logged in, you can select your any Send destination as the
this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive (BOX) default send destination. Same will appear in Scan & Send widgets too.
of the machine to an SMB, FTP, Email, Box, USB. - Send to PC: Scans and sends scanned output to a computer.
• Save as Default : Allows you to save the current Scan & Send settings as the • Address Book Settings: This address book contains contacts that are
default Scan & Send settings. After you save the default Scan & Send available to all users. You can use the address book to make contacts
settings, all future send tasks use these settings. Tap this option in the Action available to anyone who uses the machine.
Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan & Send
settings. - Google Address Book: This address book contains the contacts
registered in your Google contacts list. You must log into your Google
• Restore Default : Allows you to restore the Scan & Send settings to the account to access your Google Address Book.
default Scan & Send settings of the machine. This option changes the
current Scan & Send settings to the original settings configured at the • UI Configuration: Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan
factory. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default & Send menu. Tap the + or - symbol on the menu icons to add or remove
Scan & Send settings. menus. You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different
position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus.
• Send Settings : Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a
destination. The scanned document is sent as an image file. Tap this option
in the sub menu (action overflow menu) to scan and attach a file to the
current message.
- Filing Policy: The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine
handles name conflicts when saving files.
- Print Confirmation Report: You can use this feature to get
confirmation on executed Scan & Send destination's successfully or
not.

Job progress • Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job. • Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and
• Detail : Tap this button to see the status, destination, sender, and time of the then click on any option you want to know about.
job.
• Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being sent. The
image in the preview area indicates the current send settings, such as the Add Destination
orientation and size of the file.
Tap to add a recipient’s email address or a fax number. If you want to send
to SMB, FTP, Box, PC, or USB click on respective buttons.
(see "Understanding the My Page menu" on page 37).
Original
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in" This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type
on page 280). for the current scan job.
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
• 2 Sided, Book: For originals that are printed on both sides.

Setting options • 2 Sided, Calendar : For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back
is rotated 180 degrees.
You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab.
To use 2 Sided, Book and 2 Sided, Calendar, load the originals on the
DSDF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DSDF, it
(Send > Sub menu(action overflow) > UI Configuration). automatically changes to 1 Sided.
• Some menus are disabled. If so, it is not available to your machine.

Scan Options - Ultra Fine: Recommended for originals containing extremely fine
details. This option is only available if the receiving machine also
Set file options of the scanned output. supports Ultra Fine resolution.
• File Name: Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination.
• File Format: Select a file format for the scanned output. Book Scan
• Resolution: Adjust the document resolution. The higher this value, the Use this feature to scan a book. If the book is too thick, lift the DSDF until its
clearer the result, but scan time may take longer. hinges are engaged by the stopper, then close the DSDF. If the book or
• Quality: Use this option to produce a high quality document. The higher magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the DSDF open.
quality you select, the larger file size. • Off: Disable this feature.
• OCR Language: When producing scanned output for OCR software, select • Left Page: Scans only the left page of the book.
the appropriate language. This is supported when Searchable PDF option is
selected in File Format settings. • Right Page: Scans only the right page of the book.
• Both Pages(From Left): Scans both facing pages from the left page.
Fax Options • Both Pages(From Right): Scans both facing pages from the right page.
If you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can • Book Center & Edge Erase: You can set shaded areas to erase shadows
adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax. caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies.
• Resolution
- Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will Advanced Fax (fax user only)
reduce the transmission time.
Set the sending options for fax, such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send.
- Fine: Recommended for the originals containing small characters, thin
lines, or text from a dot-matrix printer. • Off: Disables this feature.
- Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing fine details. This • Quick Start Fax: The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after the
option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super first page has been scanned. Originals with many pages can be sent this way
Fine resolution. without overflowing the machine’s memory.

• Delay Send: Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time. Define the
Job Name and Start Time.
Original Size
Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals.
You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours • Mixed Size: Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a
after the scan. combination of different paper types.
• Custom size: If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper, use
the arrows to set the required size.
Email Settings
Set email information, such as From, Subject and Message. Original Orientation
Original Type • Upright Images: The original is in landscape orientation. The images or text
Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page.
type for the current job. • Sideways Images: The original is in portrait orientation. The images or text
• Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images. in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page.
• Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.

Color Mode
Use this option to set the default color mode used for copy jobs.
• Mono: Displays an image in black and white.
• Gray: Displays an image in gray.
• Color: Displays an image in color.

JPEG file format cannot be selected if color mode is set as MONO.
This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the
Image Adjustment
• Background Density: Allows you to adjust the density of the background
This option allows you to manually adjust the image. in the scanned image. This feature is useful when scanning originals that
• Darkness: Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file. This have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background.
feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little • Backside Image: Allows you to erase any text or images that show through
contrast. from the other side of the original. You can use this feature to ensure that
• Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read. your scanned output is clearly legible.
You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images.
• Contrast: allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output
crisper or smoother. You can use this feature to improve the quality of an
image or increase the readability of text.

5

Fax screen
Groups Open a list of group addresses.
Contacts Open a list of your contacts.
Pause Pause the current job.
Add Contacts Add a new contact to your addresses.
Add To Add to the destination list.
Destination List Open the destination list.
On Hook Enable On Hook dialing. When you hear the dial

tone, enter a fax number using the numeric
keypad on the screen.
Send Send the fax.
Command keys
keypad Open the keypad.
Favorites Open a list of frequently-used addresses.
Recent View any recently-used addresses.

Sending a fax
This section explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission. Tap or select other settings.
8
7
You can place the originals use either the DSDF or the scanner glass. If the
originals are placed on both the DSDF and the scanner glass, the machine Sending a fax
will read the originals on the DSDF first, because it has higher scan priority.
6
on page 45).
Setting the fax header
Tap Send from the home screen or Apps.
2
In some countries, you are required by law to specify your fax number on any fax Adjust the document settings in the Send tab or More tab.
you send. 3
Tap and enter a fax number directly using on the screen, then tap
4 or using Favorites, Recent, Groups, Contacts tap from the display
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Machine ID & Fax No on the display
1 screen. screen.
Tap the ID Name input box. The pop-up keyboard appears.

2 • You can send a fax up to 10 destinations at once.
Enter your name or the company name (see "Understanding the pop-up
3 keyboard" on page 38).
• You can view and delete a destination from Destination List ( ).
• To insert a pause, tap while entering the fax number. A dash (-)
Tap Done. appears on the display when a pause is inserted.
4
• If you want to use On Hook dial, tap and enter a fax number using
Tap the Fax Number input box.
5 the numeric keypad on the screen while you hear the dial tone.
Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel.
6
Tap to start the process.
Tap Done. 5
7
Sending a fax
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial
• You can send a fax directly from your computer (see "Using a fax in your attempts, follow the steps below:
computer" on page 124).
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Redial on the display screen.
• When you want to cancel a fax job, tap (Stop) from virtual hard key
before the machine starts transmission. Or tap Job Status from the
home screen or Apps, select the job you want to delete (see "Job Status" Delaying a fax transmission
on page 34).
• You cannot send emails with the machine while it is sending a fax. You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time (see "General fax settings"
on page 139).
Sending a fax using speed dial numbers To cancel a delayed fax, tap Off before it is sent.
When you are prompted to enter a destination number for your fax, you can use
a speed dial number previously set by you.
• 1-500 can be assigned for the speed dial numbers

• For one-digit speed dial numbers, press and hold the corresponding
number on the numeric keypad on the control panel.
• For two or more digit speed dial numbers, press the first digit button and
hold the last number on the numeric keypad on the control panel.
Resending automatically
If the line is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the machine
automatically redials the number.

Receiving a fax
This section explains how to receive faxes, and the special options available.
9
Receiving manually in Telephone mode

8
Changing Receive Mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook and then pressing (Start)
from virtual hard key when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the machine begins receiving a fax.
machine answers the call after a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax. If you want to change to another receive mode, follow the steps 10
below:
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Mode on the display screen.
mode
• Telephone: Receive faxes by pressing On Hook and then (Start) from
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on
virtual hard key.
the back of your machine.
• Fax: Receive incoming faxes normally and immediately enter the fax
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine records the message as
reception mode.
normal. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to
• Answering Machine/Fax: Use when an answering machine is attached to receive the fax.
your machine. Your machine answers the incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax
tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive
the fax.
• Receive start code: When you receive a call on the extension phone and
hear fax tones, press the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine
receives the fax. Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the
fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.

Receiving a fax
Tab On to enable this feature.
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
2
is turned off, or no answering machine is connected to the EXT socket,
your machine automatically enters Fax mode after a predefined number When the machine receives a fax in this mode, Print option becomes
of rings. available. If you want to print the secured faxes, tap Print. All secured faxes
• If your answering machine has a configurable ring counter, set it to will then be printed.
answer incoming calls before it rings more than once.
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is
If you want to set a passcode, tab the passcode blank and enter a
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering machine. 3 passcode.
Otherwise, outgoing messages from the answering machine will
interrupt your phone conversations.
If you want incoming faxes to be always saved to memory, tap Whole
4 Day. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
11
Tap Start Time and set the specific start time using the up/down
Receiving in Secure Receive mode 5 buttons. Tap Set when finished.
Tap End Time and set the specific end time using the up/down buttons.
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by 6 Tap Set when finished.
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing
of incoming faxes when the machine is unattended. In Secure Receive mode, all
Tap or select other settings.
incoming faxes are saved to memory. 7
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Secure Receive on the display screen. To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, tap Off. Incoming faxes will be
1 automatically printed again.
Secure Receive mode can only be configured by a user with a registered

passcode on the machine. When the machine requests, enter your
passcode.

Receiving a fax
12 14
Setting Received Fax Printing General fax settings
Use this option to set printing options for received faxes. You can set the default fax options. Set the most frequently-used fax settings.
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Received Fax Printing on the display screen. Tap Settings > Fax Settings on the display screen.
• Duplex: The machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper.
• Output Tray: Specify the tray where the fax is printed. • Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
• Auto Reduction: Set to reduce the size of incoming pages automatically.
• Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper
loaded in the paper tray, the machine can reduce the size of the original to then click on any option you want to know about.
fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine. If you do not enable this • You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open a
option, the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page. The web browser from a networked computer and type the IP address of your
original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages. machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings tab >
Machine Settings > Fax (see "Settings tab" on page 162).
• Printing Large Pages: Use to fit where faxes are printed.
• Stamp Received Name: Print the received fax information on printouts.

Option Description
• Paper Source: Select a tray as the paper source.
Machine ID & Fax No You can set the machine ID and fax number to
13 be printed at the top of each page.
Forwarding faxes
You can set your machine to forward sent or received faxes to email, SMB, FTP,
and so on. If you are out of the office but need to receive faxes, this feature may
be useful.

Receiving a fax
Option Description Option Description
Redial Set the machine to re-dial the fax number if Receive Mode Select the fax receiving mode.
the recipient’s fax line is busy or not answered. • Telephone: Press On Hook Dial and then
Set the number of re-dial attempts and the Start to receive a fax.
interval between attempts.
• Fax: Receive incoming faxes normally and
• Redial Term: Select terms for re-dialing immediately enter the fax reception mode.
using the up/down arrows.
• Answering Machine/Fax: Use when an
• Redial Times: Select a re-dial time using answering machine is attached to your
the up/down arrows. Select 0 to disable machine. Your machine answers the
redialing. incoming call, and the caller can leave a
message on the answering machine. If the
Prefix Dial Set the number to be dialed before the
fax machine senses a fax tone on the line,
destination number. Users may use this to the machine automatically switches to Fax
access a PABX (e.g. 9) or an area code (e.g. 02). mode to receive the fax.
Once this number is set, it automatically
appears on the screen when entering a Ring to Answer Set the number of times the machine rings
phone/fax number. before answering an incoming call.
ECM Mode Set the machine to correct errors. This helps Toll Save Set the machine to send faxes in the toll save
overcome poor line quality and ensures any time to reduce phone bill costs.
faxes you send are properly transmitted to any
DRPD Mode Enable a user to answer several different
other error correction-equipped fax machine.
phone numbers on the same telephone line.
Sending a fax in this mode may take more
Set the machine to recognize different ring
time.
patterns for each number. This setting may
Modem Speed Set the modem speed (4.8Kbps - 33.6Kbps). not be available in your country.

Receiving a fax
Option Description Option Description
Junk Fax Setup Use this feature to reject faxes sent from Smart Fax Diagnostics The Smart Fax feature optimizes the settings
numbers stored in memory as junk fax for your fax line.
numbers. This feature is useful to block any • Auto Configuration: When sending and
unwanted faxes. When you turn this feature receiving faxes, the machine regularly
on, you can access additional options to set checks for errors and automatically
junk fax numbers. This option may not be configures the fax settings to ensure a
available in your country. stable connection.
Set the machine to save the received faxes in • Start: Allows you to automatically detect
Secure Receivea
memory so that unauthorized people cannot or manually specify the environment when
sending or receiving faxes. Select Auto
access them when you are absent. This option
Detection to automatically detect the
restricts printing of received faxes when the
environment, or manually specify the
machine is unattended.
faxing environment as Normal,
• Off: Select to not use secure receive. VoIP(Office), Noise(Home), or Big Noise.
• On: Select to use secure receive. • Initialize Diagnostics Settings: Resets all
• Print: Select to print faxes in the memory. the settings.
You need to log-in as an administrator to a. May only be available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings
print out received faxes in memory. selected (see "Authentication" on page 289).
Received Fax Printing Set options to print received faxes.
Fax Country Setting Select a country as default. Before changing

this, connect a telephone line to the machine.
When you change the country, a ping test is
performed.

7. Setting up an Address
Book
This guide gives you guidelines for the address book.
• Understanding the address screen 143

• Using the control panel 145
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service 149
Understanding the address screen
The Address book app allows you to access and save frequently used addresses
1
in the machine. You can save fax numbers and email addresses as well as Address screen
addresses for SMB, FTP,and so on.
Tap Address book from the home screen or Apps. If want to go home, tap the You can save frequently used fax numbers, e-mail addresses, SMB server
addresses, FTP server addresses in your machine.
home( ) button.
• You can set general options (see "Setting options" on page 112).
• Contacts: Displays the name and contact information of contacts saved in

the address book.
• Favorites: Displays the name and contact information of contacts marked

as favorites in the address book.
• Groups: Lists the groups registered in the address book and the users
registered to those groups.
7. Setting up an Address Book 143

Understanding the address screen
Sub menu (Action overflow)
You cannot add a group as a member of another group.
To use some features, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-
Command keys in" on page 280).
• Search: Searches the names and contact information in the Contacts list.
To use some features, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-
• Delete Contacts: Delete the contacts you set.
in" on page 280).
• Import: You can import the address book saved from another MFP or same
MFP.
Button Name Description • Export: You can export the address book saved from another MFP or same
MFP.
Quick Menu Show the quick menu.
Search Search for a desired address.
Add Add a contact, favorite, or group.
Edit Select the address you want to edit and tap this
button.
My Program Shows list of added programs.

(Action overflow)

Using the control panel
Tap the SMB or FTP input boxes to enter that information of the
6
2
Storing individual addresses recipient.
Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps> Tap (add) on the
1 display screen.
• If you want a SMB or FTP server to allow anonymous connections, select
the Anonymous from Login Type.
• If the SMB server you entered is not registered to any domain, leave it
Tap the Name input box, and then enter the name of the recipient.
2 blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server.
• User Login Name: Select this option to create a sub-folder in the file
folder you selected. The sub-folder is named according to the user name
Tab (favorite) icon for addresses you use often and want to find easily. entered in step 5. If the file folder already has a sub-folder of the same
name, the machine does not create a sub-folder.
• Folder Creation Cycle: Set the cycle of sub-folder creation. The machine
Tap the Email input boxes to enter that information of the recipient.
3 creates sub-folders according to this option. If the file folder already has
a sub-folder of the same name, the machine does not create a sub-folder.
Speed No. is automatically assigned with the first number of unused
4 numbers.
- Every Day: A sub-folder is created every day using the name format
“YYYY-MM-DD” (for example, “2014-01-01”).
Use the Speed No. on the numeric keypad to select an address quickly.
Tap the Fax input box and enter the fax number using the numeric
5 keypad on the control panel. You can enter only numbers, area code first
if necessary.
Inserting a pause: On some telephone systems, you must dial an access

code (like 9) and listen for a second dial tone before dialing the number. In
such cases, you can insert a pause in the telephone number.

- Every Month: A sub-folder is created every month using the name
format “YYYY-MM” (for example, “2014-01”). If you want to delete an individual address, check the box of that address
- Every Year: A sub-folder is created every year using the name format
and tap Sub menu (Action overflow) > Delete Contacts.
“YYYY” (for example, “2014”).
• Create Group for Multiple Files: If you select this option and scan
multiple files, the machine creates a sub-folder in the file folder you
Tap the input field for the information you want to change. The pop-up
selected to store all sent files. 3 keyboard appears, allowing you to type in the field.
If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time, sent files are
stored as below.
Tap Done to save the information.
- When a single scanned file is sent: 4
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOC.jpg
4
- When multiple scanned files are sent:

\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC000.jpg Storing address groups
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC001.jpg
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC002.jpg Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps > Groups > (add)
1 on the display screen.
7 2 Tap the Name input field and enter a name for the group.
Tap Add contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want
3
3
Editing Individual address include in the group. Tap Done when you are finished.
When editing a contact, tap a field to change or delete the information, or add To search for a contact, tap the search field in the Add contact screen. Enter
additional fields to the contact’s information. the first few letters of a contact’s name or tap the (search) icon to show
all contacts. In the list that appears, check the boxes for the contacts you
Tap Address book > Contacts on the home screen or Apps. want to add and tap Done.
1
Tap the name of individual you want to edit. Tap (edit).
2 Tap Done to save the information.
4
5 6
Editing address groups Searching for address book entries
Tap Address book > Groups on the home screen or Apps. You can search the addresses that are currently stored in the address book.
1
Tap the name of group you want to edit and tap (edit).
2 1 Tap Address book > Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps.
Tap the (search) input field and enter a name or part of a name to
If you want to delete an address group, check the box for the group you 2 search for.
want to delete and tap (delete).
The machine then displays the search results.
3
Tap the group name input field to change the name of the group.
3 7
Tap Add contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want Deleting address book entries
4 include in the group. Tap Done when you are finished.
You can delete addresses currently stored in the address book.
To search for a contact, tap the search field in the Add contact screen. Enter
the first few letters of a contact’s name or tap the (search) icon to show To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in"
all contacts. In the list that appears, check the boxes for the contacts you on page 280).
want to add and tap Done.
Tap Address book > Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps.
5 To remove an individual address from the group, check the box for that 1
address and tap (delete).
Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and tap tap
2 Sub menu (Action overflow) > Delete Contacts.
6

Tap OK in the confirmation window and the selected addresses are
3 deleted from the address book.
Viewing the address book
You can browse for individual addresses and groups.
Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps.

1
Tap an address to see more information about it.
2
You can tap (edit) when viewing an address to edit its information
directly, or when viewing an address group to see a list of that group’s
members.

Using SyncThru™ Web Service
You can store addresses conveniently from the networked computer using Enter a name to add and select a speed dial number in the General field.
9
SyncThru™ Web Service. Only for users registered on the machine can store
addresses through login SyncThru™ Web Service.
• A Speed Dial Number allows you to enter that number on the numeric
keypad to dial that number quickly.
9
• Check Favorite for addresses you use often. You can easily find them in
Storing on your local machine search results.
This method allows you to store addresses on your machine’s memory. You can Enter an email address in the Email field.
add addresses and group them into categories. 10
Enter a fax number in the Fax field.
11
Adding individual addresses to the address book 12 Check the enable SMB box in SMB and enter the SMB information.
Enter a server IP address or a host name in SMB Server Address.

1 Open a web browser from your networked computer. 13
Enter a server port number in SMB Server Port.
2 Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example, 14
http://12.123.123.123)
Enter a login name in Login Name.
15
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service shows.
3
If you want to allow anonymous connections to your SMB or FTP server,
Click Login.
4 check the Anonymous box. This box is unchecked by default. If you
checked the Anonymous box, go to step 18.
Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to.
5
Click Login.
6 16 Enter a password in Password and re-enter the same password in
Confirm Password.
Click Address Book.
7
Enter a domain name in Domain.
8 Click Add. 17
- Month: A sub-folder is created every month using the name
If the SMB server you entered is not registered to a domain, leave this field format “YYYY-MM” (for example, “2014-01”).
blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server.
- Year: A sub-folder is created every year using the name format
“YYYY” (for example, “2014”).
Enter the scan file folder to store scanned images in Path. • Create new folder only if scan output consist of several files: If
18 you select this option and multiple files are scanned, the machine
Example: /shared_Folder/
creates sub-folders in the file folder you selected and the sent files
Select Scan folder creating policy options: are stored in the sub-folder.
19
• Create new folder using login name: If you select this option, the
machine creates a sub-folder in the file folder you selected. The sub- If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time, sent files are
folder is named using the user name from step 15. stored as below.
• When a single scanned file is sent:
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOC.jpg
If the file folder already has a sub-folder of the same name, the machine
does not create a sub-folder. • When multiple scanned files are sent:
• Create new folder every: You can set the cycle of sub-folder \\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC002.jpg
creation. The machine create a sub-folder according to these
options:
Select the policy for generating file names in Filing Policy. If the server
20 already contains a file of the same name, the file is processed based on
If the file folder already has a sub-folder of the same name, the machine the following options.
does not create a sub-folder.
• Change Name: The sent file is automatically saved as a pre-defined
file name.
- Day: A sub-folder is created every day using the name format
“YYYY-MM-DD” (for example, “2014-01-01”). • Cancel: Do not save the sent file.
• Overwrite: Overwrite the existing file with the newly sent file.

Enter the file name in File Name to store on the server. Check the box for the address you want to edit and click Edit.
21 8
To verify that the process is working with your settings, click Test. Change the address information.
22 9
Enter FTP server information as you did for SMB. Click Apply.
23 10
Click Apply.
24 Click Undo to reverse any changes you entered. Click Cancel to close the
window without saving any changes.
Click Undo to delete the information you entered. If you click Cancel, the
Add window is closed.
Deleting individual addresses in the address book

Editing individual addresses in the address book Open a web browser from your networked computer.
1
Open a web browser from your networked computer. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser(for example,
1 2 http://123.123.123.123).
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
2 http://123.123.123.123). Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
3
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page. Click Login.
3 4
Click Login. Enter your ID and password, and select a domain to log in to.
4 5
Enter your ID and password, and select a domain to log in to. Click Login.
5 6
Click Login. Click Address Book.
6 7
Click Address Book.
7
Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and click Delete. Enter a name or part of a name to search for in the search field.
8 8
Check the box at the top of the column to select all addresses.
Click OK in the confirmation window to delete the addresses. You can search for addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number,
Email, SMB, and so on.
For example, if you want to find a fax number, click the drop down list next
Searching for individual addresses in the address
to and select Fax Number.
book
Open a web browser from your networked computer.

1 9 Click and the search results appear.
2 http://123.123.123.123) You can see the addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number, Email,
SMB, etc.
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
3 For example, if you want to see the addresses which are included fax
number, click drop down list below LDAP and select Fax Number.
Click Login.
4
Enter your ID and password, and select a domain to log in to.
5
Exporting Address Book
Click Login.
6
You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV
Click Address Book.
7 file format using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "SyncThru™ Web Service" on

You can sort the address book by clicking each column header. For example, 1 page 159).
click Speed No. to sort the addresses by speed dial number. Click a column
a second time to reverse the sort order.
Click Address Book tab > Individual.
2

Select Export from the Task drop down list. - Fax: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 40 byte using
3 numbers (0-9) and special characters (#,*,-).
Select the option you want and click the Export button.
4 - Email: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 128 byte in
email address format (ex: printer@domain.com)
Then the address book file stored in your computer.
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "SyncThru™ Web Service" on

Importing Address Book 1 page 159).
You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the Click Address Book tab > Individual.
machine by exporting to the machine from your computer.
2
Select Import from the Task drop down list.
3
Followings are the conditions for editing the imported CSV file. Select Browse, and select the stored file.
4
• Password-protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited.
Click Import > OK.
• The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF-8. 5
• Do not change the first row (model name, version, title field).
• Use comma(,) as a separator. Grouping addresses in the address book
• When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine,
the existing address book data is deleted. Open a web browser from your networked computer.
• Make sure to enter valid data. If you enter invalid data, unexpected errors
1
can occur. Refer to the below rules for entering valid data. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
- Speed dial: A number is required for each address. You cannot use
2 http://123.123.123.123).
duplicate numbers. Only numbers are allowed.
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
- User Name: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 64 byte
in UTF-8. <, “, >, \, / in not allowed.
3
Click Login.
4

5 Enter your ID and password and select a domain as you log in the Editing address groups in the address Book
machine.
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

6 Click Login. 1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser.
7 Click Address Book. 2
(Example, http://123.123.123.123)
Click Groups.
8 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service shows.
Click Add Group.
3
9 Click Login.
Enter the group name to be added in Group Name.
4
10 Enter the ID and password, and select a domain as you log in the
Check Add individual(s) after this group is created.
5
11 machine.
Click Login.
If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group address you 6
made, skip this step. You can add individual addresses next time pressing Click Address Book.
Group Details. 7
Click Groups.
8
Click Apply.
12 9 Check the group address you want to edit and press Edit Group.
Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in

13 Individual Address Book. 10 Change the group address information.
Click Apply.
Click the arrow in the middle. The selected addresses are added in Group 11
14 Address Book.
Press Undo to delete the information you entered. If you press Cancel, the
Click Apply.
15 Edit window closes.

Deleting address groups from the address book Checking address groups
Open a web browser from your networked computer. You can see information about address groups and add or delete individual
1 addresses from the group in the Group Details window.
2 Open a web browser from your networked computer.
http://123.123.123.123) 1
3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page. 2 http://123.123.123.123)
Click Login.
4 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
3
Enter the ID and password, and select a domain as you log in the
5 Click Login.
machine. 4
Enter the ID and password, and select a domain as you log in the
6 Click Login. 5 machine.
Click Address Book.
7 Click Login.
6
Click Groups.
8 Click Address Book.
7
Check the box for the groups you want to delete.
9 Click Groups.
8
Click Delete Group.
10 Click the group address you want to see and click Group Details.
Click OK when the confirmation window appears. 9

• You can add individual addresses directly. Check the addresses you want
to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book.
• You can delete individual addresses directly. Check the addresses you
want to delete and press Delete in Group Address Book.

8. Management Tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
• Accessing management tools 158

• SyncThru™ Web Service 159
• Easy Capture Manager 166
• Samsung AnyWeb Print 167
• Easy Eco Driver 168
• Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 169
• Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 170
• Using Samsung Printer Status 173
• Using Samsung Printer Experience 175
• Using Box 181
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
2
• For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers.

3
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
4
Click the management tool you want to use.
5
• After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs.
• For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
8. Management Tools 158

SyncThru™ Web Service
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network
2
environment through SyncThru™Web Service. Required web browser
• Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for You need one of the following web browsers to use SyncThru™Web Service.
SyncThru™ Web Service. • Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
• Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the
settings or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. • Chrome 4.0 or higher
• FireFox 3.0 or higher
1
• Safari 3.0 or higher
What is SyncThru™Web Service? 3
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network
Connecting to SyncThru™ Web Service
parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™ Web Service.
Use SyncThru™ Web Service to:
IPv4 supported web browser
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer®, that supports IPv4
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. 1 addressing as a URL.
• Change the printer preference.
Enter the machine’s IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
• Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. field and press the Enter key or click Go.
• Get support for using the machine.
• Upgrade machine software. You can get the machine’s IP address from the machine report (see"Report"
on page 295).
Your machine’s SyncThru™ Web Service website opens.

2
IPv6 supported web browser 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
A log-in page appears.
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer®, that supports IPv6
1 Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain. Then click on
addressing as a URL. 2 LOGIN.
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Stateless Address, Stateful Address,
2 Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report.
Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the
machine (see "Log-in" on page 280.)
You can get the machine’s IPv6 address from the machine report If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
(see"Report" on page 295). on page 163.
Enter the IPv6 addresses (eg., http://[3ffe:10:88:194:213:77ff:fe82:75b]).

3
The address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
Your machine’s SyncThru™ Web Service website opens.

4
4
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an

administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in, but
you will not have access to or view the Settings tab and the Security tab.

• Print Information: You can print all the reports provided by your machine.
5
Information tab You can use these reports to help you maintain your machine. This feature
is also available in the machine (see "Report" on page 295).
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
6
things, such as the machine’s status, supplies’ status, count information,

network information, and more. You can also print reports, such as Box tab
configuration page.
• Active Alerts: You can check the current alerts in the machine. Use this You can manage the Box. This feature is also available from the machine (see
information to troubleshoot machine errors. "Using Box" on page 181).
• Supplies: You can check the supplies’ information. For toner cartridges and
imaging units, supplies’ status is displayed with a visual graph showing you Forward / Print / Send / Download
the amount of each supply left. Page counts are also available which can
help you predict when to change the supplies. This feature is also available
You can manage the folder and files in Forward, Print, Send, Download.
from the machine (see "Supplies Life" on page 295).
• Add: You can create Box in Print, Send, Download tab and Secured Box in
• Usage Counters: You can check the billing information and usage counter
Print, Send tab.
of the machine. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Counter" on page 35). • Delete: You can delete Box and file in Forward, Print, Send, Download tab.
• Current Settings: Shows the current settings of the machine and network. • Edit: You can edit Box and file name in Print, Send, Download tab.
• Machine Information: Shows the current machine settings. • Browse: If you want to browse the Box, check the Box you want then click
Browse.
• Network Information: Shows the current network settings. Use this page
as a reference and change the necessary settings needed for using the • Task: You can copy and move the Box and files in Print, Send, Download
network. tab.
• Security Information: Shows the current security settings of the machine

and network.

- Scan & Send: You can set scan related settings. This feature is also
7
Address book tab available from the machine (see "Understanding the Scan & Send
screen" on page 108).
You can manage the address book. This feature is also available from the - Box: You can set box related settings.This feature is also available from
machine (see "Understanding the address screen" on page 143). the machine (see "Using Box" on page 181).
• Individual: You can manage individual entries in the address book. - Address Book Setting: This address book contains contacts that are
available to all users. You can use the address book to make contacts
• Group: You can manage group address books. available to anyone who uses the machine.
- E-mail Notification: When an error occurs or the consumables are
running out, the machine sends a notification to the administrator via e-
8
Settings tab mail. You can set whether to use this feature or not. You can also select
which alerts to receive and when.
Settings tab has sub menus, Machine Settings and Network Settings. You • Network Settings: You can set up the network environment to use your
cannot view or access this tab if you do not log-in as an administrator (see machine as a network machine. You can also set the settings from the
"Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 160). machine. Refer to the network setup chapter (see "Network Setup" on page
303).
• Machine Settings: You can set machine settings.
- General: You can set general machine information to use in the
- System: You can set machine related settings. network and set ethernet settings. This feature is also available from the
- Printer: You can set print related settings such as darkness or adjust the machine (see "Ethernet" on page 297).
background. This feature is also available from the machine (see "Print - TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6, Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP,Telnet, WSD, SLP, UPNP, mDNS,
Settings" on page 292). CIFS, SNMP, SNMPv1/v2, SNMPv3: You can set protocol settings.This
- Copy: You can set copy related settings such as darkness or adjusting feature is also available from the machine
the background. This feature is also available from the machine (see - Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP): You can set server settings for outgoing
"Setting options" on page 97). emails. If this setting is not configured, you cannot use scan to email
- Fax: You can set fax related settings such as fax number or redial times. feature. Outgoing emails will be sent through SMTP server you set here.
This feature is also available from the machine (see "Understanding the This feature is also available from the machine (see "Network Protocol"
fax screen" on page 126). on page 299).

- HTTP: You can allow or block users from accessing the SyncThru™ Web • Network Security: From the SyncThru™ Web Service, select the Security
Service. This feature is also available from the machine (see "Network tab > Network Security.
Protocol" on page 299). - Interface Security: The Interface Security menu sets the basic policy for
- Proxy: You can set proxy settings and enable authentication to connect connected interfaces. Only Print is enabled by default. For example, if
to licence server through http proxy server. These proxy settings are Scan is not enabled, then you cannot scan from a device connected via
provided currently only if the administrator wants to update an XOA Wi-Fi. You must select Scan or All Protocols in the menu to enable
application’s license online through proxy server. scanning.
- Digital Certificate: You can manage digital certificates. A digital
9
certificate is an electronic certificate that verifies the secure association

Security tab between communication nodes. You need to add the certificate for SSL
communication. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Network Security" on page 300).
The security tab has System Security, Network Security, User Access Control
and System Log. You cannot access this tab if you do not log-in as an - Secure Connection: You can enable or disable secure connection to
administrator (see "Log-in" on page 280). use more enhanced secure network channel. For secure
communication, using the Secure Connection feature is
• System Security: From the SyncThru™ Web Service, select the Security tab recommended.
> System Security.
- SNMPv3: You can set SNMPv3.
- System Administrator: Enter the system administrator’s information.
- IP Security: You can set IP security settings.
The machine sends email notification to the email address set here. This
feature is also available from the machine (see "Contact Information" on - 802.1x (Ethernet): You can enable/disable 802.1x Security as well as
page 302). manage filtering rules. This feature is also available from the machine
(see "802.1x" on page 299).
- Feature Management: You can enable/disable network features.
Check the features you want to enable and click Apply.
- Information Hiding: You can enable/disable network features. Check
the features you want to enable and click Apply.
- Restart Device: You can reboot your machine. Click the Restart Now
button to reboot.

- IP/MAC Filtering: You can set filtering options for IP and MAC • User Access Control: You can restrict users from accessing the machine or
addresses. If the administrator does not add a filtering rule for IPv4, IPv6, application. You can also give specific permission for user to only use certain
and MAC addresses, nothing is filtered. If the administrator has added a feature of the machine. For example, you can allow user A to only use print
filtering rule, filtering will be applied to the entered IPv4, IPv6, and MAC feature. In this case, user A will not be able to scan, copy or fax with the
addresses. machine.
▪ IPv4 Filtering: You can enable/disable IPv6 filtering as well as - Authentication (Activating access control): You can choose the
manage filtering rules. This feature is also available from the authentication method for user authentication. Select a mode and click
machine (see "Network filtering settings" on page 311). on the Options button. This feature is also available from the machine
(see "Authentication" on page 289).
▪ IPv6 Filtering: You can enable/disable IPv6 filtering as well as
manage filtering rules. This feature is also available from the - Authorization (Giving rights): You can give permissions to a user to
machine (see "Network filtering settings" on page 311). only use certain features of the machine.
▪ MAC Filtering: You can enable/disable Mac filtering as well as - Authority Management: You can give different rights to different
manage filtering rules. This feature is also available from the users. For example, you can allow user A to use all the machine’s
machine (see "Network filtering settings" on page 311). functions while giving user B only the right to print.
• External Authentication Server: Set the servers for authentication. - Accounting: You can manage accounts.
• 802.1x: You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based - User profile: You can store user information on the machine’s hard
authentication. If this authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed drive. You can use this feature to manage the users using the machine.
to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is You can also group the users and manage them as a group. You can add
authorized. Use this feature to protect your network. This feature is also up to 1,000 entries. User identified by user ID and password are allowed
available from the machine (see "802.1x" on page 299). to modify their password. They are allowed to view all of their profile
information. When it comes to the role, users are allowed to see only the
role they belong to but not its permissions.

• System Log: You can keep logs of events that have happened in the • Backup/Restore: You can backup the machine’s configurations and restore
machine. The administrator can record and manage the machine usage the configuration when there is a problem with the machine. The saved
information by keeping the system log files. The system log files are stored (backed up) files can also be used to configure other machines.
on the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), and when it is full, it will erase old
• Contact Information: You can view contact information. To change the
data. Export and save the important audit data separately using the
information, (see "Contact Information" on page 302).
exporting feature.
• Link : You can view links to useful websites where you can:
- Log configuration: You can enable or disable keeping logs. You can
also backup log files by periods and transfer to a repository server. - view product information and get support (Samsung website).
- Log Viewer: You can view, delete, and search log files. - download manuals and drivers.
- order consumable supplies.
10
- register your machine on-line.

Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware, managing
applications, and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also
connect to the Samsung website or download manuals and drivers by selecting
the Link menu.
• Firmware Version: You can check the firmware version used in the
machine. Check the version and update it if necessary. This feature is also
available from the machine (see "Machine Details" on page 301).
• Application Management: You can add or delete applications/license. If

you add an application, you need to activate the license of the installed
application. Some applications may not have a license. This feature is also
available from the machine (see "Application Management" on page 293)

Easy Capture Manager
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard. Now you can easily print your captured screen as
captured or edited.

Samsung AnyWeb Print
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).

Easy Eco Driver
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1 Open a document to print.
2 Open printing preference window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
3 From the Favorites tab, select Eco Printing Preview.
4 Click OK > Print in the window. A preview window appears.
5 Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
6 Click Print.
If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print, check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference
window.

Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Samsung Easy
Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features mentioned below:
• Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or multiple pictures.
• Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and
images.
• Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an

editable text format.
• Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner.
• SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or
existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
• E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents asone

E-Book or convert existing files into an E-Book format.
• Plug-in: Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program.
Click the Help ( ) button from the window, and then click on any option
you want to know about.

Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
• Available for Windows and Mac OS users only. The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.
• For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung

machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
11
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer
and network printers added by network discovery (Windows
For Mac, 1 only).
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic

sections as described in the table that follows:

Printer This area gives you general information about your machine. Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
information You can check information, such as the machine’s model section also includes links to applications in the advanced
name, IP address (or Port name), and machine status. settings.
4
You can view the online User’s Guide. If you connect your machine to a network, the
2 SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You
can directly open the necessary section in the user’s Contents Displays information about the selected machine, remaining
guide. area toner level, and paper. The information will vary based on the
5 machine selected. Some machines do not have this feature.
Application Includes links for changing to the advanced Order Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window.
information settings(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online.
6
help, and about.
Select the Help menu or click the button from the window and click on
3 The button is used to change the user interface to
any option you want to know about.
the advanced settings user interface (see
"Advanced settings user interface overview" on page
172).

Alert Settings (Windows only)
12
Advanced settings user interface overview

This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible • Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
for managing the network and machines.
• Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
• Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.

Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
Job Accounting
Device Settings Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper, software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
• Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the

device.
• Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and device settings.
• Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.

Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
machine status. Icon Mean Description
Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no

errors or warnings.
• The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use. Warning The machine is in a state where an error might
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine occur in the future. For example, it might be in
(see "System requirements" on page 253). toner low status, which may lead to toner empty
• Available for Windows OS users only. status.
Error The machine has at least one error.
13
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:

Using Samsung Printer Status
User’s Guide You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide

1 when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
Supplies You can view the percentage of toner remaining in

Information each toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
2 differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
Option
You can set printing job alert related settings.
3
Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from

4 online.
Cancel Print • Cancel Print : If print job is waiting in the print

queue or printer, cancel all user's print jobs in the
or
print queue or the printer.
Close
5 • Close : Depending on the status of the machine or
the supported functions, the Close button may
appear to close the status window.

Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s website, and check connected machine information. This application
will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the machine is
connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
Available for Windows 8 users only.
14
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience ( ) tile.
Printer This area gives you general information about your
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
Information machine. You can check information, such as the
described in the following table: 1
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.

15
2 User’s Guide You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature. Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
Order Supplies Click on this button to order replacement toner
3 cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
Adding a printer
Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
4
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
From the Charms, select Settings.
1
Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking, Settings.
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
5
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This Select Add Printer
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via 2
USB cable. Select the printer you want to add.
3
Device List & The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung You can see the added printer.
Latest Scanned Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
6 Image latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here. This section is If you see mark, you can also click mark to add printers.
for the users with multi-functional printers.

Deleting a printer 4 Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Click the Print button to start the print job.

1 From the Charms, select Settings. 5
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
Select Remove Printer.

2
Select the printer you want to delete.
3
Click Yes.
4
You can see that the selected printer is removed from the screen.
16
Printing from Windows 8
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing

1
From the Charms, select Devices.
2
Select your printer from the list
3

Cancelling a print job Basic tab
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
• You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
( ) in the Windows task bar.
• You can also cancel the current job by pressing (Stop) button on the
control panel.
Opening more settings
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or Basic
options.
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
You can set up more printing parameters.
Eco settings
1 This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
From the Charms, select Devices.

2
Select your printer from the list
3
Click More settings.
4

Advanced tab Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If

this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that this features are not
supported.
Paper settings
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Layout settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.

Using the sharing feature Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
installed on the computer using the sharing feature.
1 documents face up into the document feeder.
This feature is only available for printing jpeg, bmp, tiff, gif, and png file
formats.
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
2
Click Scan ( ).
1 Select the content you want to print from other application. 3
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
2 From the Charms, select Share > Samsung Printer Experience. 4 resolution.
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
3 5 Click Prescan ( ) to check the image.
Click the Print button to start the print job.
4 6 Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
17
Click Scan ( )and save the image.

Scanning from Windows 8 7
• When you place the originals in the DSDF, Prescan ( ) is not

This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
available.
• You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.

Using Box
18 19
Understanding the Box screen Command keys
Documents and images printed, scanned, downloaded and sent from

computers can be stored in the Box. The Box is located on your machine’s hard When you selected files, shows below meus.
disk drive (HDD). It means the documents are stored on the HDD. You can create
a password for a certain Stored Document, so unauthorized users cannot access • (Print) : Print files directly.
it. Also, you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features
• (Send) : Send files to Fax, Email, Server, Box, or USB.
and send the documents to several destination such as email, server or fax. You
can set a Stored Document and Stored Document feature with SyncThru™ Web • (Delete) : Delete folders and files.
Service.
• If important data is stored in the Box, we recommend you to backup the Button Name Description
data regularly. Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of
data caused by misuse or failure of the machine. Quick Menu Open the quick menu.
View Mode Select the view type.
My Program Show my program list.

Using Box
Button Name Description Storage
(Action overflow) • Select All : Select all folders and files. Button Name Description
• Print Options : Set options for printing. Forward Manage the forward data.
• Create folder : Create a folder.
• Rename : Rename a folder or a file.
To use this feature, you may need to log-in
• Delete : Delete folders and files. as an administrator (see "Log-in" on page
• Copy : Copy folders and files. 280).
• Move : Move folders or files to other storage.
• Clear Browsing Info : Clear browsing Print Manage the stored print data.
information.
• Detail : View the detail information about a
folder or a file. Send Manage the stored send data.
• Filing Policy : Select a filing policy.
• Format : Formatting files or data. Download Manage the stored download data.
USB Use a USB Drive device.

Using Box
Job progress Creating a private folder
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job.
This function is not available in Download and USB storage.
• Detail : Tap this button to see the status, folder path, and time of the job.
• Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being saved.
• Public: All users can access to the files.
The image in the Preview area indicates the current send settings, such as
the orientation and size of the file. • Private: Set up the password to prevent unauthorized person from
accessing.
20
Select the type of Storage (Print or Send) in which you want to create
Using Box 1 the folder.
Tap > Create folder.

To use the Box feature, tap Box from the home screen or Apps. 2
Storage allows you to store the scanned data on HDD (your machine's hard disk Input the folder name and select Set as Private, and then tap OK.
drive) in your machine. The stored data can be sent to different destinations like
3
Fax, Email, Server, Box, or USB. the appropriate information in the ID, Password, Confirm Password
4 fields, and then tap OK.
Using multi check
This function is not available in Print and Send storage.
Touch and hold a folder or file, then change the multi check mode.

9. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
• Redistributing toner 185

• Replacing the toner cartridge 187
• Replacing the imaging unit 189
• Tips for avoiding paper jams 191
• Clearing jams 192
• Understanding display messages 208
• Power and cable connecting problems 213
• Solving other problems 214
If you cannot solve problems using this chapter, contact your administrator or service center.
You can see the contact information from Settings > System > Contact Information. This
information is configured by the machine’s administrator.
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
• White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side.
• The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display.
• The computer’s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer
Status" on page 173).
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
IlIllustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
9. Troubleshooting 185
Redistributing toner
Replacing the toner cartridge
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life:
• The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when the toner cartridge should be replaced.
• The computer's Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer Status"
on page 173).
Check the Product Code on top of the toner cartridge before ordering and installing to your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 234).
• Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
• Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page
21).
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Replacing the toner cartridge
1
Toner cartridge
Replacing the imaging unit
2
Imaging unit
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a
paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines.
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Loading
paper in the tray" on page 50).
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on

page 249).
Clearing jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
In tray1
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
Clearing jams
4
In optional tray
21).
• This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
Clearing jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
Clearing jams
5
In the multi-purpose tray
Clearing jams
6
Inside the machine
The Fuser area is HOT, please wait until device cools down before accessing this area. Turn power off to cool the machine down. Take care when removing paper
from the machine.
Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
Clearing jams
Clearing jams
Clearing jams
7
In the exit area
The Fuser area is HOT, please wait until device cools down before accessing this area. Turn power off to cool the machine down. Take care when removing paper
from the machine.
Clearing jams
Clearing jams
8
In the duplex unit area
Clearing jams
Clearing jams
9
Clearing original document jams
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper originals.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.
Clearing jams
Original paper jam in front of scanner
21).
Clearing jams
Original paper jam inside of scanner
21).
Clearing jams
Clearing jams
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
21).
• This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21).
Understanding display messages
Messages appear on the display screen to indicate the machine’s status or
Message Meaning Suggested solutions
errors. Some error messages are shown with graphics to help you troubleshoot
problem. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their End of life. Replace with The indicated imaging Replace the imaging unit
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary. Messages and their new imaging unit unit has reached its with a Samsung-genuine
explanations are listed in alphabetical order. estimated imaging imaging unit (see
unit lifea. "Replacing the imaging
unit" on page 189).
• If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
End of life. Replace with The indicated toner Replace the toner
again. If the problem persists, call for service.
new toner cartridge cartridge has reached cartridge with a Samsung-
• When you call for service, provide the service representative with the its estimated cartridge genuine toner cartridgeb
contents of display message.
lifea. (see "Replacing the toner
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or cartridge" on page 187).
models.
• [tray number] indicates the tray number. Engine System Failure There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
[error number]. Turn off the engine system. back on again. If the
• [media type] indicates the media type.
then on. problem persists, call for
• [media size] indicates the paper size. service.
Engine Failure [error
• [error number] indicates the error number.
number].
Call for service if the
problem persists.
Fan Failure: [error There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
Did not supply enough The machine cannot Remove the sealing tape
number]. Turn off then the fan system. back on again. If the
toner. Remove seal tape detect a toner from the toner cartridge.
on. Call for service if the problem persists, call for
of toner cartridge or cartridge. Or the seal Refer to Quick Install
problem persists. service.
shake it. Call for service if tape was not removed Guide.
the problem persists from the toner Front door is open. Close The door is not Close the door until it locks
cartridge. it. securely latched. into place.
Message Meaning Suggested solutions Message Meaning Suggested solutions
Fuser Failure [error There is a problem in Turn the machine off and Input System Failure There is a problem in Open and close the tray. If
number]. Turn off then the fuser unit. back on again. If the [error number]:Pull [tray the tray. the problem persists, call
on. problem persists, call for number] out and insert for service.
service. it.
Fuser Unit Failure [error
number]. Turn off then Lamp Failure: [error There is a problem in Open the door, then close
on. number]. Open the door, the lamp. it. If the problem persists,
then close it. Call for call for service.
Imaging Unit Failure: The imaging unit is not Install the imaging unit. If
service if the problem
[error number]. Install installed. it is already installed, try to
persists
imaging unit again reinstall the imaging unit.
If the problem persists, call Load [tray number] with Thepapersize specified Load the correct paper in
for service. [Letter], [Plain] paper in the printer the tray.
properties does not
Imaging unit Failure: There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
match the paper you
[error number]. Call for the imaging unit. back on again. If the
are loading.
service problem persists, call for
service. LSU Failure: [error There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
number]. Please turn off the LSU. back on again. If the
Imaging unit is not The imaging unit you Install a Samsung-genuine
then on problem persists, call for
compatible. Check users have installed is not for imaging unit, designed for
service.
guide your machine. your machine (see
"Available consumables" LSU Failure: [error Turn the machine off and
on page 234). number]. Turn off then back on again. If the
Input System Failure There is a problem in Open and close the tray. If
[error number]:Check the tray the problem persists, call
[tray number] for service. Motor Failure: [error There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
connection. number]. Turn off then the motor system. back on again. If the
Original paper jam in The originals are Clear the jam (see Paper Jam in exit area. Paper has jammed in Clear the jam (see "In the
front of the scanner jammed in Dual scan "Original paper jam in the exit area. exit area" on page 199).
document feeder. front of scanner" on page
Paper Jam inside of Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In
204).
machine inside of the machine. tray1" on page 192 or "In
Original paper jam inside The originals are Clear the jam (see optional tray" on page 193
of the scanner jammed in Dual scan "Original paper jam inside or "Inside the machine" on
document feeder. of scanner" on page 205). page 196).
Paper in output bin is The output tray is full. Remove printouts from Paper jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in Clear the jam (see "In
full. Remove printed the output tray, the the feeding area of the tray1" on page 192).
paper machine resumes printing. tray.
Paper is empty in [tray There is no paper in the Load paper in the tray. Paper jam in Tray 2 Clear the jam (see "In
number]. Load paper. tray. optional tray" on page
193).
Paper is empty in tray There is no paper in the Load paper in the multi-
MP. Load paper. multi-purpose tray. purpose tray. Prepare new imaging The estimated lifea of Prepare a new imaging
unit the imaging unit is unit for a replacement (see
Paper is low in [tray Running out of paper Load paper in the tray.
close. "Replacing the imaging
number]. Load paper. in the tray.
unit" on page 189).
Paper Jam at the bottom Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In the
Prepare new toner The estimated Prepare a new cartridge
of duplex path during duplex printing. duplex unit area" on page
cartridge cartridge lifea of toner for a replacement. You
201).
Paper Jam inside of is close. may temporarily increase
duplex path the printing quality by
redistributing the toner
Paper Jam at the top of (see "Redistributing toner"
duplex path on page 185).
Rear door is open. Close The door is not Close the door until it locks Scanner locked or The CCD (Charged Unlock the CCD lock. Or
the door securely latched. into place. another problem Couple Device) lock turn the machine off and
occurred. has been locked. back on again. If the
Replace with new toner The indicated toner Replace the toner
problem persists, call for
cartridge cartridge has almost cartridge for the best print
service.
reached its estimated quality when this message
cartridge lifea. appears. Using a cartridge Sensor Failure: [error There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
beyond this stage can number]. Turn off then the sensor system. back on again. If the
result in printing quality on. Call for service if the problem persists, call for
issues (see "Replacing the problem persists. service.
toner cartridge" on page
Shake toner cartridge Small amount of toner You may temporarily
187).
and then install. Replace is left in the indicated increase the printing
If the machine stops toner cartridge if the cartridge. quality by redistributing
printing, replace the toner problem persists the toner (see
cartridge (see "Replacing "Redistributing toner" on
the toner cartridge" on page 185).
page 187).
Shake toner cartridge Small amount of toner You may temporarily
The indicated imaging Replace the imaging unit and then install. Replace is left in the indicated increase the printing
unit has almost for the best print quality toner cartridge if the cartridge. quality by redistributing
reached its estimated when this message problem persists the toner (see
imaging unit lifea. appears. Using a imaging "Redistributing toner" on
Replace with new
unit beyond this stage can page 185). If the problem
imaging unit
result in printing quality persists, call for service.
issues (see "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page The room temperature is The machine is in a Please adjust room
189). not suitable for this set room with improper temperature (see
use. Please adjust room room temperature. "Specifications" on page
temperature 247).
Toner Cartridge Failure: There is a problem in Turn the machine off and
[error number]. Call for the toner cartridge. back on again. If the
service problem persists, call for
service.
Toner cartridge is not A toner cartridge is not Reinstall the toner

installed. Install the installed. cartridge.
cartridge
Toner cartridge is not The imaging unit you Install a Samsung-genuine

compatible. Check users have installed is not for imaging unit, designed for
guide your machine. your machine (see
"Available consumables"
on page 234).
Top door of scanner is The Dual scan Close the cover until it
open document feeder locks into place.
cover is not securely
latched.
[tray number] cassette is The tray is not securely Close the tray until it locks
pulled out. Insert insert it latched. into place.
properly.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated cartridge, which indicates the
average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of
pages may be affected by the percentage of image area, operating environment, printing
interval, media type and media size.
b. When the toner cartridge has reached its end of life, the machine will stop printing. In this
case, you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru™Web Service. (Settings
> Machine Settings > System > Setup > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge Stop)
or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > System > Supplies Management >
Toner Cartridge Stop). Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the
device's system.
Power and cable connecting problems
Condition Suggested solutions
The machine is not receiving power, • Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a (Power / Wake Up) button on the control,
or the connection cable between the press it.
computer and the machine is not
• Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.
connected properly.
Solving other problems
The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the
11
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is Paper feeding problems
corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Other problems include:

• See "Display screen problem" on page 214.
Paper jams during Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing jams" on page 192).
• See "Paper feeding problems" on page 214. printing.
• See "Printing problems" on page 215. Paper sticks together. • Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray (see
"Print media specifications" on page 249).
• See "Printing quality problems" on page 218.
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of
• See "Copying problems" on page 223. paper (see "Print media specifications" on page
249).
• See "Scanning problems" on page 224.
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the
• See "Faxing problems" on page 225. paper.
• See "Operating system problems" on page 227. • Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick
together. Try a fresh ream of paper.
10
Multiple sheets of • Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray.

paper do not feed. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
Display screen problem
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear
the paper jam (see "Clearing jams" on page 192).
The display screen does • Adjusts the brightness of the display screen.
not show anything. • Turn the machine off and back on again. If the
problem persists, call for service.
12

Printing problems
Paper does not feed • Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
into the machine. • Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess The machine The machine is not Check the power cord connections.
paper from the tray. does not print. receiving power. Check the power switch and the power
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets source.
the specifications required by the machine (see The machine is not Select your machine as your default
"Print media specifications" on page 249). selected as the default machine in your Windows.
• If an original does not feed into the machine, the machine.
DSDF rubber pad may require to be replaced. Check the machine for the following:
Contact a service representative.
• The front door is not closed. Close the front door.
The paper keeps • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess • Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing jams" on
jamming. paper from the tray. If you are printing on special page 192).
materials, use the multi-purpose tray. • No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray"
on page 50).
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only
paper that meets the specifications required by the • The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed. Install
machine (see "Print media specifications" on page the toner cartridge or imaging unit.
249). If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the The connection cable Disconnect the machine cable and
front door and remove any debris. between the computer reconnect it.
and the machine is not
• If an original does not feed into the machine, the
connected properly.
DSDF rubber pad may need to be replaced.
Contact a service representative. The connection cable If possible, attach the cable to another
between the computer computer that is working properly and
Envelopes skew or fail Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of and the machine is print a job. You can also try using a
to feed correctly. the envelopes. defective. different machine cable.
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
The machine The port setting is Check the Windows printer setting to A print job is The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the page or
does not print. incorrect. make sure that the print job is sent to extremely complex. try adjusting the print quality settings.
the correct port. If the computer has slow.
more than one port, make sure that
Half the page is The page orientation Change the page orientation in your
the machine is attached to the correct
blank. setting may be incorrect. application. See the printer driver help
one.
screen.
The machine may be Check the Printing Preferences to
The paper size and the Ensure that the paper size in the
configured incorrectly. ensure that all of the print settings are
paper size settings do printer driver settings matches the
correct (see "Opening printing
not match. paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the
preferences" on page 66).
paper size in the printer driver settings
The printer driver may be Repair the machine software. matches the paper selection in the
incorrectly installed. software application settings you use.
The machine is Check the display message on the
malfunctioning. control panel to see if the machine is
indicating a system error. Contact a
service representative.
The document size is so If printing GUI, make more hard disk
big that the hard disk space available for your print and try
space of the computer is printing the document again.
insufficient to access the
print job.
The machine The paper option that For many software applications, the
selects print was selected in the paper source selection is found under
materials from Printing Preferences the Paper tab within the Printing
the wrong may be incorrect. Preferences. Select the correct paper
paper source. source. See the printer driver help
screen (see "Opening printing
preferences" on page 66).
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
The machine The machine cable is Disconnect the machine cable and The machine Incompatibility between Printing the PDF file as an image may
prints, but the loose or defective. reconnect. Try a print job that you does not print the PDF file and the enable the file to print. Turn on Print
text is wrong, have already printed successfully. If PDF file Acrobat products. As Image from the Acrobat printing
garbled, or possible, attach the cable and the correctly. Some options.
incomplete. machine to another computer that you parts of If the PDF file do not Try printing a job from Printer Driver.
know works and try a print job. Finally, graphics, text, include the font or do
try a new machine cable. or illustrations have the object which is
are missing. set on Interactive mode.
The wrong printer driver Check the application’s printer
was selected. selection menu to ensure that your
machine is selected. The print The resolution of the Reduce the photo size. If you increase
The software application Try printing a job from another quality of photo is very low. the photo size in the software
is malfunctioning. application. photos is not application, the resolution will be
good. Images reduced.
The operating system is Exit Windows and reboot the are not clear.
malfunctioning. computer. Turn the machine off and
back on again. Before Using damp paper can This is not a problem. Just keep
printing, the cause vapor during printing. Try a fresh ream of paper.
If you are in a DOS Change the language setting. machine emits printing.
environment, the font vapor near the
setting for your machine output tray.
may be set incorrectly.
The machine Paper size and paper size Set the correct paper size in the
Pages print, The toner cartridge is Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If does not print setting do not match. Custom Paper List in the Paper tab in
but they are defective or out of toner. necessary, replace the toner cartridge. special- sized the Printing Preferences (see "Paper
blank. paper, such as Options" on page 68).
The file may have blank Check the file to ensure that it does not
pages. contain blank pages. billing paper.
Some parts, such as the Contact a service representative. Your machine The oil used to protect After printing about 100 color pages,
controller or the board, has an odd the fuser is evaporating. there will be no more smell. It is a
may be defective. smell during temporary issue.
initial use.
13
Condition Suggested Solutions

Printing quality problems
The top half of The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
the paper is • Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there
printed lighter Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to
might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. than the rest of Recycled (see "Opening printing preferences" on page
the paper 66).
Condition Suggested Solutions
Light or faded • If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page,
print the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily
extend the toner cartridge life. If this does not improve the
print quality, install a new toner cartridge.
• The color tone might not be adjusted. Adjust the color
tone.
Toner specks • The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, paper may be too moist or rough (see "Print media
the paper may be too moist or rough (see "Print media specifications" on page 249).
specifications" on page 249).
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too machine. Contact a service representative.
low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service
resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help
representative.
screen of the printer driver.
• Check the location of the machine. If the area is not well-
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate
ventilated, this problem may occur.
that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Contact a service
representative.
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be
dirty. Clean the LSU, contact a service representative.
Condition Suggested Solutions Condition Suggested Solutions
Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
page: • The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched.
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
the job. service representative.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of • The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be
paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 249). dirty. Cleaning the inside or contact a service
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can representative.
cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or If vertical streaks appear on the page:
brand of paper.
• The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing
dirty. Cleaning the inside or contact a service
Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to thick paper
representative.
(see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
• If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service Color or Black If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
representative. background • Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan.
White Spots If white spots appear on the page:
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to
(low humidity) or a high level of humidity (higher than
the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller
80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading.
may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Cleaning
the inside or contact a service representative. • Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Cleaning the inside or

contact a service representative.
Toner smear If toner smears on the page: Background Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly
• Clean the inside of the machine. Cleaning the inside or scatter distributed on the printed page.
contact a service representative. • The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until
specifications" on page 249). necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
• Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
service representative. • If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the
printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have
• Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan. overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams
Contact a service representative. can cause problems.
Vertical If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at • If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a
repetitive even intervals: printed page, adjust the print resolution through your
defects software application or in Printing Preferences (see
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a repetitive mark
"Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
occurs on the page, run a cleaning sheet through several
times to clean the imaging unit. Cleaning the inside. If you Toner particles The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
still have the same problems, remove the imaging unit and are around bold
install a new one. Contact a service representative. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing
characters or Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the pictures Recycled (see "Opening printing preferences" on page
defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will 66).
likely correct itself after a few more pages.
• Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an
representative. overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.
Misformed • If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow Wrinkles or • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
characters images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different creases • Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media
paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 249). specifications" on page 249).
• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy • Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating
effect, the scanner unit may need service. Cleaning the the paper 180° in the tray.
scan unit or contact a service representative.
Page skew • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Back of Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine.
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media printouts are Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative.
specifications" on page 249). dirty
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly
and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the
paper stack.
Curl or wave • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature
and humidity can cause paper curl (see "Print media
specifications" on page 249). Solid Color or • The imaging unit may not be installed properly. Remove
Black pages the imaging unit and reinsert it.
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating
the paper 180° in the tray. • The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing.
Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
service representative.
• The machine may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Loose toner • Clean the inside of the machine. Cleaning the inside or Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the
contact a service representative. machine:
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media • Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating
specifications" on page 249). the paper 180° in the tray.
• Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a • Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing
service representative. Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to thin paper
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 66).
An unknown Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m
Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that image (3,281 ft) or above.The high altitude may affect the print
should be solid black: repetitively quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the
appears on a correct altitude setting to your machine.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper.
few sheets or
Remove the paper and turn it around.
loose toner,
• The paper may not meet paper specifications (see "Print light print, or
media specifications" on page 249).
contamination
occurs.
Horizontal If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
stripes • The imaging unit may be installed improperly. Remove the
imaging unit and reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective. Remove the imaging
unit and install a new one. Contact a service
representative.
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.
14
Copying problems
Condition Suggested solution
Copies are too light or too dark Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps. You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original
contains faint markings or dark images (see "Changing Darkness" on page 95).
Smears, lines, marks, or spots • If the defects are on the original, tap Copy from the home screen or Apps (see "Changing Darkness" on page 95).
appear on copies. • If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit. Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service representative.
Copy image is skewed. • Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Blank copies print out. Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF.
Image rubs off the copy easily. • Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams occur. • Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper
guides, if necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer • Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or
copies than expected before other documents that use more toner.
running out of toner. • The DSDF may be left open while copies are being made.
• The machine may be turned on and off frequently.
15
Scanning problems
The scanner does not work. • Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
"Loading originals" on page 45).
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.
• Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace
the printer cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).
The unit scans very slowly. • Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
Message appears on your • There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.
computer screen: • The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
• Device can’t be set to the H/W • The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
mode you want.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
• Port is being used by another
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
program.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• Port is disabled.
• Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has failed.
16
Faxing problems
The machine is not working, • Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
there is no display, or the • Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
buttons are not working.
• Ensure that the power is turned on.
No dial tone. • Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 22).
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
• Find the optimal line for communication (see "General fax settings" on page 139).
The numbers stored in memory Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.
do not dial correctly.
The original does not feed into • Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick
the machine. or thin.
• Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.
• The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.
Faxes are not received • The receiving mode should be set to fax.
automatically. • Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
• Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
• Find the optimal line for communication. To check that, see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu (see "General fax settings" on page 139).
The machine does not send. • Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.
• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank • The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
spaces or is of poor-quality. • A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 187).
Some of the words on an The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
incoming fax are stretched.
There are lines on the originals Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 353).
you sent.
The machine dials a number, The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
but the connection with the ask them to solve the problem on their side.
other fax machine fails.
Faxes do not store in memory. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear at the You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small strip
of text at the top.
17
Operating system problems
Common Windows problems
“File in Use” message appears Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
during installation.
“General Protection Fault”, Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in
timeout error occurred” ready mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
message appear.
Samsung Printer Experience is Samsung Printer Experience is not installed. Download the app from the Windows Store and install it.
not shown when you click more
settings.
Machine information is not Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
displayed when you click the (Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
device in the Devices and
Printers. If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
Common Mac problems
The machine does not print PDF Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
files correctly. Some parts of
graphics, text, or illustrations
are missing. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on
normally during cover page the cover page.
printing.
When printing a document in Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or
higher, colors print incorrectly.
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.
Common Linux problems
There is no xsane nor simple- For some Linux distributions, there might be no default scan application. To use scan features, install one of scan applications using
scan application on my Linux download center supplied by the OS(ex. Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu, Install/Remove Software for openSUSE, Software for
machine. Fedora).
Scanner can not be found via For some Linux distributions, strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary port for searching
network. network devices. In such a case, open the snmp port - 22161 manually or disable the firewall temporarily while using the device.
When printing more than one The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12.04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter 'pdftops'. Update 'cups-filters' package to version
copy, the second copy does not 1.0.18 to fix the problem ('pdftops' is a part of 'cups-filters' package).
print.
Unchecking the collate option For some distributions, GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option. As workaround, set the default value of collate
in the Print Dialog does not option to False using the system's printing utility(execute "system-config-printer" in the Terminal program).
work.
Printing always works with This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9.10 CUPS package. Update CUPS version to 1.4.1-5ubuntu2.2.
duplex.
Printer is not added through The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in 'system-config-printer' package of the Debian 7 (http://bugs.debian.org/cgi-
system's printing utility. bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=662813 in Debian bug tracking system). Please use another way to add printer (CUPS WebUI for example)
Paper size and orientation are The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it's related to 'leafpad' text editor on Fedora 19. Please use other text editors like 'gedit'.
disabled in the Print Dialog
when opening text files.
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.
Problem Possible cause Solution
The PostScript file cannot be The PostScript driver may not be installed • Install the PostScript driver.
printed correctly. • Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for
printing.
• If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex. You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.
A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript. Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.
The optional tray is not The printer driver has not been configured to Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the
selected in the driver recognize the optional tray. tray option.
When printing a document in The resolution setting in the printer driver may Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader.
higher, colors print incorrectly
10.Supplies and Accessories
This guide provides information on purchasing Consumables, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.

• Ordering supplies and accessories 233
• Available consumables 234
• Available accessories 235
• Installing accessories 237
• Available maintenance parts 236
• Checking replaceable’s lifespan 241
• Using a USB Drive device 242
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to
obtain the list of available accessories.
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
• See "Available consumables" on page 234.
• See "Available accessories" on page 235.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
10. Supplies and Accessories 233

Available consumables
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
Type Average yield Part name
Average continuous cartridge yield : Approx. 7,000 standard pages • M4583 series: MLT-D304S
Average continuous cartridge yield : Approx. 20,000 standard pages • M4583 series: MLT-D304L
Toner cartridgea
Average continuous cartridge yield : Approx. 40,000 standard pages • M4580 series: MLT-D303E
• M4583 series: MLT-D304E
Approx. 100,000 pages • M4580 series: MLT-R303

Imaging unitb
• M4583 series: MLT-R304
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size.
b. Based on simplex 3 average A4/Letter-size pages per job (and above mentioned coverage pattern). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics,
media type and media size.
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner
cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific
country conditions.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine
Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine’s
warranty.

Available accessories
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 8).
Accessory Function Part name

Memory module Extends your machine’s memory capacity. SL-MEM001: 2 GB
Optional tray If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems, you can attach an additional 550a SL-SCF4500
sheet tray.
You can easily move the machine using the stand with its wheels. SL-DSK001S
When using the optional Stand, you must

Stand install the foot as shown in the Optional Stand
Install Guide provided with the optional
Stand. Otherwise, the machine could fall over
if on incline and cause bodily injury.
Wireless/NFC kit This kit lets you use your machine as a Wireless and NFC machine. SL-NWE001X
To purchase Wireless /NFC kit, contact the source where you bought the machine.
Installing Wireless /NFC kit can be performed only by an authorized service
provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine.
a. Plain paper 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond).

Available maintenance parts
You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems
resulting from the worn-out parts. Maintenance parts are mostly rollers, belts and pads. However, the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the
model. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. To purchase
maintenance parts, contact the retailer where you bought the machine. The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the "Samsung Printer
Status" program. Or if your machine supports display screen, a message is displayed in the display screen. The replacement period varies based on the operating
system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, paper type, paper size, and job complexity.

Installing accessories
1 2
Precautions Setting Device Options
• Disconnect the power cord When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on. machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power
in Device Options.
cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
• Discharge static electricity

The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
1
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or • For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any 2
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before • For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static Sound > Printers.
electricity again.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service
• For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers.
component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if
battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to • For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
the instructions. Devices and Printers.
Right-click your machine.

3
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
4
For Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context
menus, select the Printer properties.

• Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
If Printer properties item has ▶ mark, you can select other printer drivers identification information with each document you print.
connected with selected printer. - User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
Select Device Options. - Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
5 group permission can start a print job.
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating

system you are using. If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
Select the appropriate option.

6 • Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.

Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or 7
models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
• Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this

feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
• Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
• Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.

3
Upgrading a memory module
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine
Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's.
The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 235).

After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer
properties window. You can control the active job queue and file policy (see "Using Box" on page 181).

Checking replaceable’s lifespan
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the
remaining lifespan of Consumables. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
Tap Settings > Management > Supplies Life from the main screen.
1
Check the consumables life.
2

Using a USB Drive device
This chapter explains how to use a USB Drive device with your machine. You must use only an authorized USB Drive device with an A plug type
connector.
4
Understanding the USB screen
To use the USB feature, tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.
Documents and images printed and sent from USB can be stored in the Box (see
Use only a USB Drive device with metal-shielded connector.
"Using Box" on page 181).
About USB Drive device Only use a USB Drive device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
USB Drive devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
more room for storing documents, presentations, music and videos, high
resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB Drive device:
• Scan documents and save them on a USB Drive device.
• Print data stored on a USB Drive device.
• Format the USB Drive device.
Your machine supports USB Drive devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of
512 bytes.
Check your USB Drive device’s file system from your dealer.

6
Do not insert the USB Drive device to other ports except the ports which is Printing from a USB Drive device
as shown below the image. If you insert the USB Drive device to other ports,
the machine shows warning message on the display screen.
You can directly print files stored on a USB Drive device. You can print TIFF, JPEG
and PRN files.
USB print option supported file types:
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible. PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box
when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed
directly from USB Drive device (see "Printing to a file (PRN)" on page 86).
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
• PDF: PDF 1.7 and below

• Do not remove the USB Drive device while it is in use. The machine
warranty does not cover damage caused by a user’s misuse.
In case of 8bit CMYK JPEG files, Job could be cancelled.
• If your USB Drive device has certain features, such as security settings and
password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For
details about these features, see USB Drive device’s User’s Guide.
To print a document from a USB Drive device:

Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine. Select the appropriate option.
1 5
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on • Copies: Selects the number of copies.
it (see "About USB Drive device" on page 242).
• Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used.
• Auto fit: Allows you to scale your print job to the selected paper size
• The machine cannot detect the unformatted USB Drive device. Format,
in the tray regardless of the document size. Select a tray, and press
and then reinsert the USB Drive device into the USB port on your
On.
machine.
• If the machine did not detect your USB Drive when themachine is in Tap icon to begin printing.
power save mode. Wake up the device and wait until the machine 6
returns to ready state. Then reinsert the USB Drive back into the USB port
After printing is completed, you can remove the USB Drive device from
on the front of your device. 7 the machine.
Tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.

2 7
Managing USB Drive device

The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device.
3
Touch and hold folder or document you want to print from the list. You can delete image files stored on a USB Drive one-by-one or all at once by
reformatting the device.
If the PDF file you selected is secured with a password, you have to know the
password for printing. Enter the password when the machine requires the
After deleting files or reformatting a USB Drive device, files cannot be
secure password. If you do not know the password, the print job will be
restored. Confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it.
cancelled.
Tap > Print Options.

4

Deleting an image file
If the file is in a folder, press the folder name.
Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
1
Tap > Format.
2 Tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps. 4
Tap Format when the confirmation window appears.
3 The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device. 5
Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list.
If the file is in a folder, press the folder name.
Tap > Delete.

4
Tap Delete when the confirmation window appears.
5
Formatting a USB Drive device
Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
1
Tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.
2
The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device.
3
Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list.

11.Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
• Specifications 247
• Regulatory information 257
• Copyright 269
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items Description
Dimensiona Width x Length x Height 530 x 459.5 x 649 mm (20.87 x 18.09 x 25.55 inches)
Weighta Machine with consumables 32.04 kg (70.64 lbs)
Noise Levelb c Ready mode Less than 30 dB (A)
Print mode Less than 54 dB (A)
Copy/ Scan Scanner glass Less than 56 dB (A)

mode
Document feeder Less than 56 dB (A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 30°C (50 to 86 °F)
Storage (packed) -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104 °F)
Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH
Storage (packed) 10 to 90% RH
Power ratingd 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V
11. Appendix 247

Specifications
Items Description
Power consumptione Average operating mode Less than 900 W
Ready mode Less than 30 W
Power save mode Less than 1.8 W
Power off modef Less than 0.45 W
a. Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset and other accessories.
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
c. China only: If the equipment's noise is louder than 63 db (A), the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice.
d. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.
e. The power consumption may be affected by the machine’s status, setting conditions, operating environment, and measuring equipment and method the country uses.
f. Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected.
11. Appendix 248

Specifications
2
Print media specifications
Type Size print media weighta/Capacityb

Dimensions
Tray1 / Optional tray Multi-purpose tray
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb bond) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb bond)
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) • 550 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) • 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)

Plain paper
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches) Not available in optional tray.
Index Card 76 x 127 mm (3.00 x 5.00 inches) Not available in tray1/optional tray.
Postcard 4 x 6 102 x 152 mm (4.00 x 6.00 inches) Not available in optional tray.
Postcard 100 x 148 100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 inches) Not available in optional tray.
11. Appendix 249

Specifications
Dimensions
Envelopec Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
Envelope No. 9 98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches) • 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) • 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)

Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches) • 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Thick paperd e Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 91 to 120 g/m2 (24 to 32 lb bond) 90 to 120 g/m2 (24 to 32 lb bond)
section
Thicker paper Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1/optional tray. 164 to 220 g/m2 (44 to 59 lb bond)
section
Thin paper Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 69 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb bond) 60 to 69 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb bond)
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
• 550 sheets • 100 sheets
Executive, A5,
Statement
Labelsf g Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond) 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond)
Executive, A5, A6,
Statement
Card stockd Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 121 to 163 g/m2 ( 32 to 43lb bond) 121 to 163 g/m2 ( 32 to 43lb bond)
section
11. Appendix 250

Specifications
Dimensions
Recycled Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 90 g/m2 ( 16 to 24 lb bond) 60 to 90 g/m2 ( 16 to 24 lb bond)
Executive, A5,
Statement
Preprinted Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g/m2 ( 20 to 24 lb bond) 75 to 90 g/m2 ( 20 to 24 lb bond)
Executive, A5,
Statement
Bond Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120 g/m2 ( 28 to 32 lb bond) 105 to 120 g/m2 ( 28 to 32 lb bond)
Executive, A5,
Statement
Colored, Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
Cotton, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Punched Paper Executive, A5,
Statement
Letterheadg Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
Executive, A5,
Statement
11. Appendix 251

Specifications
Dimensions
Archivee Letter, Legal, US Folio, Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g/m2 ( 20 to 24 lb bond) 75 to 90 g/m2 ( 20 to 24 lb bond)
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, PostCard 4
x 6, PostCard 100 x 148
Minimum size (custom) 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a. If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), load a paper into the tray one by one.
b. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
c. Envelope Monarch and Envelope C6 are not supported for optional tray.
d. Index Card is supported only multi-purpose tray.
e. A6, PostCard 4 x 6, and PostCard 100 x 148 are not supported for optional tray.
f. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield)
g. A6 is supported only multi-purpose tray/tray1.
11. Appendix 252

Specifications
3
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
CPU RAM free HDD space
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB
Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB
Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB
Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1 GB) 15 GB
Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB
Windows® 8 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 2 GB 20 GB
Windows® 8.1 • Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2012 Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 32 GB
Windows Server® 2012 R2
11. Appendix 253

Specifications
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
• Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Mac
Requirements (Recommended)
Operating system
CPU RAM Free HDD space
Mac OS X 10.5 • Intel® processors 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB

• 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel® processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7 - 10.9 • Intel® processors 2 GB 4 GB
11. Appendix 254

Specifications
Linux
Items Requirements
Operating system RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 5, 6

Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
OpenSuSE® 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04 , 11.10, 12.04, 12.10, 13.04
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1
Mint 13, 14, 15
CPU Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)
Unix
Items Requirements
Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)

Operating system HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1 7.1 (PowerPC)
11. Appendix 255

Specifications
Items Requirements
Free HDD space Up to 100 MB
Network environment
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items Specifications
Network interface • Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
• Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN & Near Field Communication(NFC)a
Network operating system • Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows Server® 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.9
• UNIX OS
Network protocols • TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD, AirPrint, Google Cloud Print
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
a. Optional device
11. Appendix 256

Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
several regulatory statements. followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21

CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes. 6
Taiwan only
11. Appendix 257

7 10
Ozone safety Power saver
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
ventilation. When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
8
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
Mercury Safety For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.
Laws.(U.S.A. only)
11
9
Recycling
Perchlorate warning
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide)
environmentally responsible manner.
Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)
11. Appendix 258

12 13
China only Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &

electronic equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection

systems)
Website: http://www.samsung.com/cn/support/location/ This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
supportServiceLocation.do?page=SERVICE.LOCATION product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
11. Appendix 259

(The United States of America only)
16
Radio frequency emissions

Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799 FCC information to the user
14
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (USA
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Only)
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
15
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
Taiwan only guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
11. Appendix 260

• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
18
Taiwan only
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian radio interference regulations

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada. 19
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques

Russia/Kazakhstan/Belaru only
applicables aux appareils numériques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
17
RFID (Radio Frequency Interface Device)
RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. (U.S.A., France,
Taiwan only)
11. Appendix 261

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
20
Germany only of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of

an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
21 terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
Turkey only sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
24
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
22
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
Thailand only telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement. transmission the following information:
1 the date and time of transmission
2 identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
23
Canada only message; and

3 telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le or individual.
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
11. Appendix 262

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to maintain uninterrupted service to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
25
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
Ringer Equivalence Number
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company. Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone You should also know that:
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of • Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
cause harm to the telephone network. machine.
11. Appendix 263

• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
telephone and electronic specialty stores. plug.
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.You cannot rewire
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids. Important warning:

You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
You must earth this machine.
26
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
Important
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
Contact the people from you purchased the machine. colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
11. Appendix 264

You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board. EC Certification
27
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
Approvals and Certifications (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [M458x series] is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
the member states related to low voltage equipment. network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
in this document.
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and

telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
11. Appendix 265

European radio approval information (for products
28
fitted with EU-approved radio devices) Regulatory compliance statements
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
Wireless guidance
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of
considerations while operating a wireless device.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for
use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark is on the Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
system label. the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
EU countries your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
European states with restrictions on use: energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
EU Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
EEA/EFTA countries during normal operation.
No limitations at this time
11. Appendix 266

As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of are in place and the system is fully assembled.
common restrictions are listed below:
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
communication.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or

services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or
turning on the wireless device.
11. Appendix 267

29
China only
11. Appendix 268

Copyright
© 2014 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7/8, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
• Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
• iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.
• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
The software included in this product contains open source software. You may obtain the complete
corresponding source code for a period of three years after the last shipment of this product by sending an email
to mailto:oss.request@samsung.com. It is also possible to obtain the complete corresponding source code in a
physical medium such as a CD-ROM; a minimal charge will be required.
The following URL http://opensource.samsung.com/opensource/Samsung_M458x_Series/seq/28 leads
to the download page of the source code made available and open source license information as related
to this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
QR code
REV.4.00
11. Appendix 269

User’s Guide
ADVANCED(ADMINISTRATOR’S
GUIDE)
This administrator’s guide provides advanced information for administrator’s to use and
manage the machine.
Some features may not be available depending on model or country.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting on
Windows.
ADVANCED(ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)
Network settings (configuring TCP/IP) 306
1. About this Administrator’s Guide Print settings (Ports to set for network printing) 309
Set protocols 310
Convention 274
Network filtering settings 311
Intended audience 275
Installing driver over the network 312
Security policies for administrators 276
Wireless network setup (Optional) 320
Terminology used in this guide 277
Using the NFC feature (Optional) 328
Supported Mobile Apps 338
2. Advanced Features for Settings AirPrint 340
Menu Google Cloud Print™ 341
Log-in 280
4. Maintenance
Language and Input 281
Machine 282 Monitoring the supplies life 344
Admin Settings 287 Setting supplies reorder notification 345
Management 295 Replacing & redistributing supplies 346
Network Settings 297 Finding the serial number 347
System 301 Clearing memory 348
Cleaning the machine 349
3. Network Setup Tips for storing machine, supplies, and paper 355
Tips for moving the machine 356
Network environment 304 Printing a demo page 357
Accessing network setup 305
271
1. About this
Administrator’s Guide
This administrator’s guide provides advanced information for administrator’s to use and manage the machine. Your
machine provides features that are available only for administrators, such as remotely installing the driver or creating
the installer package. You can also refer to this guide for maintenance information (eg., cleaning the
machine, replacing toner cartridges). This guide provides instructional screen images, easy-to-read tables of
features, and step-by-step instructions.
• Read the safety information before using the machine.

• If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter in the user’s
guide on the User’s Guide CD (see "Troubleshooting" on page 184).
• Terms used in this administrator’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (see "Glossary"
on page 366).
• The illustrations in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its
options or models but the procedures are the same.
• The screenshots/ some menus in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
• The procedures in this administrator’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
Convention
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
Convention Description Example
Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Start
Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the

machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country.
Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible

mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge
or imaging unit.
Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute
(“Cross-reference”) Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed (See "Glossary" on page 366.)
information.
1. About this Administrator’s Guide 274

Intended audience
The expected user for this guide is an administrator with an understanding of:
• General knowledge of machine and other optional parts.
• Basic technical knowledge.
• The network printing environment.
• Network protocols – subnets, security features, addresses.
• Windows operating systems on server and client computers.

Security policies for administrators
Administrators need to adhere to the following policies in order to securely
manage the machine:
• The administrator should place the machine in a secure place where the
machine can be protected by the physical contact or modulation,
• The administrator should be fully aware of the security policies the

organization has and follow them to manage the machine.
• The administrator should give the right to use the machine to users
according to the security policies and procedures.
• The administrator should not use the authority one has over the machine
with ill intention.
• The administrator should manage the machine in a trusted network

supported environment.
• The administrator should guarantee that the certifying service via

certification server is through a safe channel and is safely managed.
• The administrator should provide a Time Stamp feature to keep an accurate

system log history.
• The administrator should provide a safe secure network channel with SSL.
• The administrator should save the system log files exported by the
Exporting feature in a safe place and protected.
• The administrator should protect the machine from any unauthorized

contact with external interfaces.

Terminology used in this guide
The following terms are used throughout this guide in examples, instructions, Acronyms Meaning
and descriptions:
EAP-MS- Extensible Authentication Protocol-Microsoft Challenge-
CHAPv2 Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2
1
IP Internet Protocol
Synonym HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
PEAPv0/EAP- Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol version 0/
MS-CHAPv2 Extensible Authentication Protocol-Microsoft Challenge-
Terms Synonym Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2
Document original SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Paper media, print media MFP Multi-Functional Peripheral/Multi-Functional Printer
Machine printer, MFP, device S/N Serial Number

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
User’s Guide manual, guide
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
2
TLS Transport Layer Security
Acronyms UPnP Universal Plug and Play

MDNS Multicast Domain Name System
The following acronyms are used throughout this guide in examples, LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
instructions, and descriptions:
SLP Service Location Protocol
SMB Server Message Block
Acronyms Meaning
SWS SyncThru™Web Service
DBMS Data Base Management System
WINS Windows Internet Name Service
EAP-MD5 Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest 5
WSD Web Service for Device

Terminology used in this guide
3
Glossary
(See "Glossary" on page 366.)

2. Advanced Features for
Settings Menu
This chapter explains the Settings menu provided by your machine. The Settings menu provides various options for
administrators to set in order to use the machine to its full capabilities.
This cer includes:
• Log-in 280
• Language and Input 281
• Machine 282
• Admin Settings 287
• Management 295
• Network Settings 297
• System 301
• This administrator’s guide mainly describes features administrators would often use and
settings to set before using the machine.
• For some options, you need to contact your local service provider to set the settings.
• Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the settings or models. If
so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Some options are only available to the administrator depending on the authentication
settings selected (see "Authentication" on page 289).
Log-in
Depending on the authentication settings you selected, you may need to log-in
as an administrator to access some options under Settings menu (see
"Authentication" on page 289). Contact your network service provider or
network administrator for more information.
Tap Settings from the home screen or Apps.

1
Select the option you want. If the option is available for only the
2 administrator, log-in screen appears.
Enter the ID, Password, and Domain using the pop-up keyboard which
appears when you tap each field.
• Enter the ID and password you first set when you turned on the machine
(see "Initial settings (administrator only)" on page 291).
• You can also use the ID button to find the recently used ID and
domain button to find the domain from the list stored in the machine.
• When you log-in, you can see the ID of the logged in user on the display.
Tap Log in.

3
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu 280

Language and Input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus.
2
You can also set onscreen keyboard options. Input

Tap Settings > Language and Input from the home screen or Apps.
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine cancels the held
job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the
Feature Description
amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the
Language Allows you to select the language. current menu.
Keyboard & Input Methods You can change the keyboard used by your
machine. 3
Speech Allows you to set the speech settings for Keyboards and Input Methods
Voiceinput.
Allows you to specify the keyboard that the machine uses.
1
• Default: Select the default input language and method.

Language
4
Allows you to select the language that appears on the display screen. Speech
Tap Settings > Language from the home screen or Apps then select the
language what you want. • Text-to-speech output: Provides audible readout of text, for example, the
contents of email messages.

Machine
Before using the machine, set up the general settings.
Feature Description
Power Saver Allows you to reduce energy consumption. If

• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or you set this option, the machine goes into
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. power saving mode when not in use.
• Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and There are two power saving modes (see
then click on any option you want to know about. "Power Saver" on page 284).
Timers Allows you to set the time for machine to

return to the default setting or cancel the held
Tap Settings > Machine from the home screen or Apps.
job if there is no input for an extended time
(see "Timers (administrator only)" on page
Feature Description 285).
Tray Settings Allows you to adjust the current tray settings, Ecoa Allows you to set the Eco mode as a default
such as the paper type and tray priorities (see and change settings for Eco mode. Using Eco
"Tray settings" on page 282). mode can save printing resources (see "Eco"
on page 286).
Sound Allows you to set the volume for button
sound, notice alarm, and sounds occurring a. Available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected (see
"Authentication" on page 289).
during fax job. You can test the volume right
after you set the level (see "Sound" on page
5
283).
Display Allows you to set the wallpaper, brightness, ,

Tray settings
and quick launch.
This feature allows you to check the current tray settings and change the
Storage Management all application’s storage.
settings if necessary. There are many options available for setting the tray and
Adjustment Allows you to adjust altitude, huminity, paper. Make the best use of the options to fit your needs for trays and paper.
image, and macine test functions.

Machine
• Feedback
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the -Haptic Feedback : Vibrate when soft keys are press and on certain UI
interaction.
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System >Input Trays. -Vibration Intensity : Set your touch feedback vibration intensity.
If some options are grayed out, it means that the grayed-out option is not Display
supported for your machine or optional parts needed to use the option are
not installed. you can change various settings for the display.
• Brightness: Allows you to adjust the LCD brightness.

6
• Quick Launch: You can select the register at Quick Launch (Screen
capture, Applications, Search)
Sound
8
You can set the volume for button sound, notice alarm, and the sounds
occurring during a fax job. Using the slide bar select the desired volume and Storage
press the Test button to test the volume.
You can management the all application storage and shows all storage
• Key Sound: Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when pressing the
button informations.
• Alarm Sound: Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when notice
alarm. If the machine’s power is cut off, you need to reset the correct time and date
once the power has been restored.
• Fax Sound: Allows you to adjust the sound volume occurring during a fax
job. This option has other sub-options.

Machine
-Auto Tone Adjustment : Performs a normal or full tone adjustment
9
Adjustment sequence immediately.
You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located. You can • Normal: Automatically adjusts the color tone. This process takes
also adjustment the image management and checking the machine test. moretime than Quick, but it produces better results.
• Altitude Adjustment : You can choose the altitude of the place where your • Full: Changes the color table entirely to adjust the color tone.
machine is located. The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,
which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. • Machine Test: Allows you to adjust the tone level.
Therefore, it is important to set the right altitude.
-Print Adjustment : Allows you to adjust the print area. When images are
-Normal: 0-1,000 m(3,280 ft) printed off the page or shifted, adjust the print area.
-High1: 1,000 m(3,280 ft)-2,000 m(6,561 ft)
10
-High2: 2,000 m(6,561 ft)-3,000m(9,842 ft)

-High3: 3,000 m(9,842 ft)-4,000 m(13,123 ft)
Power Saver
-High4: 4,000 m(13,123 ft)-5,000 m(16,404 ft)
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this option to save power.
• Humidity : Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the
environment.
The Power Save option can be wake up by pressing the display screen.
• Custom Color: Allows you to adjust the level of print density and copy
darkness.
• Tone Adjustment: Allows you to automatically adjust the color tone to

produce the best possible print quality.
-Auto Tone Adjustment Activation: Instructs the machine to automatically
calibrate the tone at certain intervals. Activate this option to perform a
normal or full tone adjustment after a certain number or pages are
printed or the machine is not used for a certain period.

Machine
Performance Optimization
11
Timers (administrator only)

When this option is On, you can wake up the machine from the power saving
mode with the following actions: When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine cancels the held
job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the
• Pressing (Power / Wakeup) on the control panel.
amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the
• Loading paper in a tray. current menu.
• Opening or closing the cover.
• Pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in. You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
• Place the originals in the DSDF. your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings >
• Plug in the USB Drive device. Machine Settings > System > Setup.
• System Timeout: The machine returns to the Copy menu if there is no input
Low Power Save for the given time.
• Held Job Timeout: When an error occurs while printing and there is no
Low Power Save option allows your machine to save power. When you are not
signal from the computer, the machine holds a job for a specific time period
using the machine for a while, some parts of the machine automatically enter
before deleting it.
Low Power Save option. Low Power Save option conserves less power than
Power Save option. • Job Timeout: When there is no input for a certain period of time, the
machine cancels the current job. You can set the amount of time the
machine will wait before canceling the job.
Power Save
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this option to save power.
The machine conserves more power in Power Save option than in Low Power
Save mode.

Machine
12
Eco
Allows you to save print resources and enables ecofriendly printing.
• Default Eco Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off.
On-Forced: Sets the Eco mode on. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode off,
the user needs to enter the password.
• Eco Features Configuration: Setting the ECO fratures.

-Default Settings: The machine is set to Default Eco mode.
-Custom Settings: Change any necessary values.

Admin Settings
This option is only available to administrators.
Feature Description
Print Settings You can set print related settings. When there
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or is no specific input for printing options, the
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. machine prints with the settings you set here.
• Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and Set the frequently used printing settings. This
feature can be useful if your company has a
specific printing form (see "Print Settings" on
page 292).
Tap Settings > Admin Settings from the home screen or Apps. Box Settings Allows you to check the current box settings
and change the settings if necessary (see "Box
Settings" on page 293)
Feature Description
Report Settings The paper source setting specifies the default
Security Allows you to set up the security related
paper tray that the machine uses to print
settings (see "Security" on page 288).
reports.
General Settings Allows you to set up the genaral settings
Application Management You can install or uninstall applications
(Measurement, Supplies Management,
license. If you add an application, you need to
Contention Management, and other
activate the license of the installed
settings) (see "General Settings" on page 290).
application. Some applications may not have
Initial Settings Allows you to set the basic settings needed to a license (see "Application Management" on
be set before using the machine (see "Initial page 293)
settings (administrator only)" on page 291).
Fax Settings You can set the default fax options. Set the
most frequently used fax settings (see
"General fax settings" on page 139).

Admin Settings
• Scheduled Image Overwrite: you can set the schedule to manually
13
Security overwrite the image.
• Overwrite Method: You can select the method for overwriting the secure
Allows you to set up the security related settings. non-volatile memory(hard).
-German VSITR: Select to overwrite the memory 7 times. When overwriting
for the 6 times, alternate 0x00 and 0xff are used to overwrite the disk,
Image Overwrite and, in the 7th time, the disk is written with 0xAA.
You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the memory. The machine -DoD5220.28-M: Select to overwrite the memory 3 times. When
overwriting three times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97 are used to overwrite
overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of
the disk’s content. This method of overwriting the disk is specified by US
recovery.
DoD.
-Australian ACSI 33: Select to overwrite the memory 5 times. When
This feature may not be available depending on models or option kits overwriting 5 times, character “C” and its complement alternatively are
installed. used to overwrite the disk. After the 2nd time, there is a mandatory
validation. For the 5th time, random data is used.
• Automatic Image Overwrite: When a job is completed, there are temporal -DoD 5220.22M (ECE): Select to overwrite the memory 3 times. When
images left in the memory. For security reasons, you can set the machine to overwriting three times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97 are used to overwrite
automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to secure the disk’s content. This method of overwriting the disk is specified by US
memory space, you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure DoD.
non-volatile memory.
-Custom Overwrite: Select to determine the number of times the memory
• Manual Image Overwrite: When printing, copying, scanning, and faxing, will be overwritten. The hard disk will be overwritten as many times as
the machine temporarily uses memory space. For security reasons, you can the number you select.
set the machine to manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you
want to secure memory space, you can manually overwrite secure non-
volatile memory. You can set the machine to repeat the manual image
overwrite after the system is rebooted.

Admin Settings
Authentication ▪Auto Logout: You can use auto logout.
▪Login Restriction: You can set the Login Restriction time, attempts, or
This feature allows you to choose the authentication method for user lock-out time.
authentication.
▪Logout Policy: You can set the logout policy.
-SMB and Local Authentication: Executes authentication process based on
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the the user information stored at SMB server.
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of ▪LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the Security tab
> User Access Control (see "Authentication" on page 289). ▪SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
▪Auto Logout: You can use auto logout.
• Mode: Select the authentication mode. -Kerberos and Local Authentication: Executes authentication process
-Basic Authentication: Activate basic authentication. Users are asked to based on the user information stored at kerberos server.
login when they select options that are only available to administrators. ▪LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
Those options are marked with “a” or “(administrator only)” in this guide.
▪SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
-Device Authentication: Activate device authentication. Device
authentication requests a user to login before being able to use the
device. Users cannot use any application without logging in. -LDAP and Local Authentication: Executes authentication process based
on the user information stored at LDAPserver.
-Application Authentication: Activate application authentication. An
administrator can choose the application(s) to require user to login to ▪LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
use. Users cannot use the selected application(s) without logging-in. ▪SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
Press Application Mode to enable authentication.
• Method
-SyncThruAaProvider: Executes authentication process based on the user
-Local Authentication: Executes authentication process based on the user information allocated from SWS.
information stored at HDD in the device.
▪LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
▪LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.

Admin Settings
14
-Standard Accounting Only: Allows users to login by entering ID and General Settings
password.
▪ID/PW Login: You can login from ID&Password. Allows you to set up the genaral settings.
▪ID Only Login: You can login from ID only.
• Secure Print: You can login from secure print. Measurement

You can choose the measuring unit and default paper size.
Accounting
You can set usage limits for each user to use each feature if Standard Supplies Management
accounting method is chosen (see "Authentication" on page 289).
Allows you to set options for supplies reorder notification. If you set this option,
the machine will display a warning message when the supplies are running out.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the Prepare the supplies in advance.
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the Security tab
> User Access Control > Accounting > Accounting Methods (see • Imaging Unit Reorder Notification: Issues a notification when the
"Security tab" on page 163). imaging unit has the specified lifespan remaining.
• Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification: Issues a notification when a
• No Accounting: Select not to use this feature. toner cartridge has the specified lifespan remaining.
• Toner Save: The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing
• Standard Accounting: Select to use the installed job accounting method. toner when printing a document.
• SyncThruaA Provider: Select to use the job accounting method provided
by the SyncThru™Web Admin Service (For detailed information, refer to the
SyncThru™Web Admin Service guide).

Admin Settings
Contention Management
If you want to stop adjusting the initial settings, press Exit. The settings you
Allows you to set Copy, Print, Send, Report priority or first in first out. have set so far will be saved. However, the Exit button is not enabled if it’s
the first time using this option.
More Settings • Language: Select the language to use on the display screen then tap Next.
• Note: Read and tap Next.

You can set Job Progress Window, Job Deletion.
• Administrator Account: Input the Name, New Password, Confirm
• Job Progress Window: Allows you to show job progress in display.
Password.The admin is entered as a default in Name field.
• Job Deletion: The Job Deletion setting specifies whether users can delete
• Date & Time: Set the Date, Time, Time Zone, date and hour format, and
all jobs or only the jobs that they create.
Day light Saving.
-Allow all jobs to delete: All users allow all jobs to delete.
-Allow only own jobs to delete: Users allow only own jobs to delete.
Example for selecting the time zone, select your country area.
• Home Screen Lock: Administrators can limit a user's ability to move/delete
widgets, apps, and shortcuts as well as use functions like Set Wallpaper or
• Device Attribution: Remove the existing device name and enter the device
Add to Home Screen.
name you want to use. then tap Next. Keep in mind to enter the device
name to be used on the network.
15
Initial settings (administrator only) • If necessary, enter the location of the machine in the Location field.
• If necessary, enter the information in the Administrator field for the
You can change the initial settings when you first turn the machine on. person to contact when any problem occurs on the machine.

Admin Settings
• Verify Connections: Tap the Test button to verify the Ethernet Card
16
connection. When Connected appears after tap the Test button, press Fax Settings
Next.
If Not connected appears, make sure that the machine is connected to the You can set the default fax options. Set the most frequently used fax settings.
network then verify the LAN connection again.
Tap Settings > Fax Settings from the display screen (see "General fax settings"
on page 139)
• If a network connection problem persists, contact your network
administrator.
• If you installed an optional fax kit or finisher, press each Test button for • If the optional fax is not installed, the fax icon will not appear on the
verify connection of them. display screen.
• The fax options are different from country to country depending on the
International Communications Regulatory. If some of the fax options
• Network Settings: Enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Host
explained in the instructions have been grayed-out, it means that the
Name, Domain Name, Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server in grayed-out option is not supported in your communication
each field. Then tap Next. environment.
• You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
• If a new IP address is assigned automatically by a DHCP or BOOTP, press Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
DHCP or BOOTP. your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings tab >
Machine Settings > Fax (see "Settings tab" on page 162).
• If you are not sure about your network environment, contact your
network administrator.
17
• SNMP Configuration: Enter the Community Name, Access Permission,

Authentication User Name, Authentication Password, Authentication Print Settings
Confirm Password, Privacy Password and Privacy Confirm Password in
each field. Then tap Done. You can set print related settings. When there is no specific input for printing
options, the machine prints with the settings you set here. Set the frequently
used printing settings. This feature can be useful if your company has a specific
printing form.

Admin Settings
Tap Settings > Print Settings from the display screen.
19
Report Settings
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of The paper source setting specifies the default paper tray that the machine uses
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the Settings tab to print reports.
> Machine Settings > Printer. (see "Settings tab" on page 162).
20
18
Application Management
Box Settings You can install or uninstall applications/license. If you add an application, you
need to activate the license of the installed application. Some applications may
You can store documents print,download and sent from computers or scanned not have a license.
images in the Box. The Box is located on your machine’s hard disk drive (HDD).
Tap Settings > Application Management from the home screen or Apps.
It means the documents are stored on the HDD. You can create a password for a
certain Stored Document, so unauthorized users cannot access it. Also, you can
print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the • You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
documents to several destination such as email, server or fax. You can set a Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
Stored Document and use Stored Document feature with SyncThru™ Web your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the
Maintenance tab > Application Management. (see "Application
Service.
Management" on page 293).
• Some models may not support this feature.
If important data is stored in the Box, we recommend you to backup the
data regularly. Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of
data caused by misuse or failure of the machine.

Admin Settings
Installing an application Uninstalling an application
Tap Install button. Select the application you want to uninstall and tap Uninstall.
1 1
A pop-up window with folders appear. Select the application file and A confirmation window appears. Press Yes.
2 press OK.
2
The application you selected is uninstalled.
A verification message appears. Read the agreement and check I accept
3 terms of the License Agreement and press OK.
Application installation begins.
Viewing an application in details
Tap the application name you want to view in details.

1
View the application’s information in details.
2
Enabling/Disabling an application
Select the application you want to enable/disable and press Enable/

1 Disable.
The application you selected is enabled/disabled.

2

Management
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information >
Print information (see "Information tab" on page 161).
• System
You can checking the supplies life and printing report. -Configuration: Print to see the machine configuration information.
Tap Settings > Management from the home screen or Apps. Product information, version information, product setting, and paper
setting are included.
21 -Supplies Information: Print to check remaining percentage of each
supply.
Supplies Life
-Usage Counter: Print to check the count of the jobs performed. Print
usage, scan usage, and fax usage information are included.
This feature allows you to check the remaining percentage of each supply.
-Demo Page: Print demo page to check if the machine is working properly.
ex) Toner cartridge / Imaging unit You can also select A4 or letter.
-Error Information: Print to check what errors have occurred in the
22
machine. Error types and counts are included.

Report -Network Configuration: Print to see the network configuration
information. Network configuration information such as TCP/IP, Raw
This feature allows you to print all the reports provided by your machine. You TCP/IP, and LPD information are printed.
can use these reports to help you maintain your machine. -Account: Print to see the account list.
• Send:
-Send Confirmation: You can set the machine to print a report whether a
send was successfully completed or not.
-Fax Received: Print to check the list of faxes received.

Management
-Fax Sent: Print to check the list of faxes sent.
-Fax Scheduled Jobs: Print to check the list of scheduled fax jobs.
-Email Sent: Print to check the transmission state of the Scan to Email job.
• Font:
-PCL Font List: Print to see the PCL font list.
-PS Font List: Print to see the PS font list.

Network Settings
This option is setting the Network Settings functions.
Feature Description
Protocol You can enable/disable IPv6 protocol.

• •Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine. IPv6 Address You can set the IPv6 address types.
• Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and DHCPv6 Configuration You can set the DHCPv6 configuration.
then click on any option you want to know about. DHCP Unique Identifier Show the DHCP Unique Identifiier.
802.1x You can enable/disable 802.1x Security.

Tap Settings > Network Settings from the home screen or Apps.
802.1x Authentication Method You can select the authentication algorithm
to use.
23
DHCPv6 Identity Association Show the DHCP Identity Association

Ethernet Identifier Identifier.
Feature Description TCP/IPv4

Ethernet Port You can enable/disable ethernet port.
You can set IPv4 settings.
Ethernet Speed You can select the speed rate of ethernet.
• IP Setting: You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses.
MAC Address Shows the Mac address of the machine. -Static: Select to enter IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address manually.
IP Setting You can set the TCP/IPv4 IP setting. -BOOTP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
DNS Configuration You can set the DNS setting.
allocated by the BOOTP Server.
-DHCP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
WINS You can configure the WINS server.
allocated by the DHCP Server.
Display IP Address You can set the machine to display the IP
address on the Home screen.

Network Settings
• DNS Configuration: You can configure the DNS server. TCP/IPv6
-Host Name: Enter the host name. You can enter up to 63 characters.
Default name is “SEC[MAC address]”. You can set the IPv6 settings.
-Domain Name: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 • Protocol: Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system. Reboot the machine to
characters. apply the change.
-Primary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use • IPv6 Address: Shows the IPv6 address types.
primarily.
-Link-local Address: This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value FE80.
-Secondary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to This address has local link scope and is automatically generated.
use as an alternative.
-Stateless Address: This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router
-Dynamic DNS Registration: If you want to use, check the checkbox(es) of advertised prefix and interface identifier. On a interface like Ethernet,
dynamic DNS registration. If this option is checked, the machine interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the
registers its host name and domain name to configured DNS servers machine. The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations.
dynamically. Also, if this option is checked and DHCP is selected, DHCP
FQDN options are automatically disabled.
More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement, but
• WINS: You can configure the WINS server. WINS is used in the Windows
only one will be displayed in the display screen.
operating system. Select this option.
• Display IP Address: You can set the machine to display the IP address on
-Stateful Address: This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6
the Notification Bar. If you select this option the IP address will show on the
server.
Notification Bar.
-Manual Address: This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can
configure manually.
• DHCPv6 Configuration: Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us.

-Use DHCP as directed by a router: DHCPv6 is enabled when a router
advertises to use DHCPv6.
-Always Enable DHCP: Regardless of router advertisement, use DHCPv6 to
acquire an IPv6 address.

Network Settings
-Never use DHCP: Disables DHCPv6.
24
• DHCP Unique Identifier: Show the DHCP Unique ldentifier. Wi-Fi

• DHCP Identity Association Identifier: Show the DHCP Identity Association
The Wi-Fi Menu is available only if the optional Wireless/NFC kit is installed.(see
Identifier.
"Wireless network setup (Optional)" on page 320).
The sub-menus in the Wi-Fi menu are nearly identical to the sub-menus in the
802.1x Ethernet menu (see "Ethernet" on page 297).
You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based authentication. If

Feature Description
this authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed to access through the
protected side of the network until the machine is authorized. Use this feature Wi-Fi Networks After the machine connects to the wireless
to protect your network. network, the access point (router) SSID
appears on the display screen.
• 802.1x : Check to enable this feature.
WPS Settings If your machine and access point (or wireless
• 802.1x Authentication Method: Select the authentication algorithm to router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS),
use. then you can easily configure the wireless
-EAP-MD5: Offers minimal security. The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to network settings through the WPS Settings
dictionary attacks, and does not support key generation. menu without the need for a computer.
-PEAP: Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft desktop Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct is a secure and easy-to-use peer-
clients and servers. For other users, it is not recommended. to-peer connection between a Wi-Fi Direct-
enabled printer and mobile device.
-EAP-MS-CHAPv2: MS-CHAPv2 provides two-way authentication between
peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response
packet and an authenticator Response message on the Success packet. 25
-TLS: This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet Network Protocol
between a client and server.
You can enable/disable what you want network protocol

Network Settings
26
Network Security
You can enable and configure these options in SyncThru™ Web Service
only(see "Security tab" on page 163).
Feature Description
IPSec You can disable IPSec if it is turned on in

SyncThru™ Web Service.
Network Filtering You can disable network filtering options if it

is turned on in SyncThru™ Web Service.
• IPSec: You can disable IP security settings.
• Network Filtering:
-MAC Filtering : Disable MAC filtering.
-IPv4 Filtering : Disable IPv4 filtering.
-IPv6 Filtering : Disable IPv6 filtering.
27
NFC
You can on/off NFC. The NFC feature is available when the optional Wireless/
NFC kit installed (see "Using the NFC feature (Optional)" on page 328).

System
Machine Details
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your .
You can check the detailed machine information. Check the status of installed
• Click the (Help) from the home screen or (quick menu) and hardware and software versions to help you maintain the machine. You can
then click on any option you want to know about. download the latest software from the Samsung website (http://
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
• H/W Configuration: Shows the status of installed hardware including

optional parts.
28
Date and Time • Capabilities: Shows the capabilities of the hardware.
• Software Versions: Shows the software versions of the systems installed.

When you set the time and date, it will be used for sending/printing delayed fax/
print jobs or will be printed on reports. However, if they are not correct, you need
30
to change it to the correct time.

Accessbility
29
Allows you to configure the machine to make it easier to use. In this menu, you
About System
can change various sound, interaction, and display options so that the machine
is more accessible to users.
You can see the hardware configuration, system capabilities, and software
version of the machine.

System
31
Contact Information
This feature allows you to view the service center's information and contact
point where users can get help. If you log in as an administrator, you can change
the contact information.
• System Administrator: Check the contact information of the administrator.
• Samsung Support: Check the information of the service center.

3. Network Setup
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network environment before using the machine. You
need to be familiar with the terms used for setting up the network environment. Refer to the glossary for terms you do
not understand ("Glossary" on page 366).
• Network environment 304

• Accessing network setup 305
• Network settings (configuring TCP/IP) 306
• Print settings (Ports to set for network printing) 309
• Set protocols 310
• Network filtering settings 311
• Installing driver over the network 312
• Wireless network setup (Optional) 320
• Using the NFC feature (Optional) 328
• Supported Mobile Apps 338
• AirPrint 340
• Google Cloud Print™ 341
Network environment
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on
Item Specification
your machine.
Network protocols • TCP/IPv4
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
• DHCP, BOOTP
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the
machine's control panel. • DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
• FTP,SMB, SMTP, WSD
machine:
• LDAP, Kerberos, 802.1x
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
Item Specification
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP,
Network interface • Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan IPSec)
• Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN & Near a. Optional device
Field Communication(NFC)a
Network operating • Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows

system Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows 8, Windows Server®
2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Various Unix OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.9
• Novell NetWare 5.x - 6.x
3. Network Setup 304

Accessing network setup
Make sure that the ethernet cable is connected to your machine.
1
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet from the home screen or
2 Apps.
Log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in" on page 280).

3

Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)
When you connect your machine to a network, you must first configure the TCP/ Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet > TCP/IPv4 from the home
IP settings for the machine. The settings shown below are the basic settings screen or Apps.
required for using your machine as a network machine. You can set TCP/IP, DNS
server, TCP/IPv6, Ethernet, and IP address allocation methods.
1
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 162).

Ethernet
You can set ethernet settings.

IP Setting
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet from the home screen or Apps.
You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the • Static: Select to enter IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address manually.
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of • BOOTP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 162). allocated by the BOOTP Server.
• DHCP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically

• Ethernet Port: You can enable/disable ethernet port. allocated by the DHCP Server.
• Ethernet Speed: Choose the speed rate of ethernet.
• MAC Address: Shows the Mac address of the machine. DNS Configuration
2
You can configure the DNS server.

TCP/IP Protocol • Host Name: Enter the host name. You can enter up to 63 characters. Default
name is “SEC[MAC address]”.
You can set IPv4 settings.
• Domain Name: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 characters.

• Primary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use
3
primarily. TCP/IPv6
• Secondary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to
use as an alternative. You can set the IPv6 settings.
• Dynamic DNS Registration: If you want to use, check the checkbox(es) of Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet > TCP/IPv6 from the home
dynamic DNS registration. If this option is checked, the machine registers its screen or Apps.
host name and domain name to configured DNS servers dynamically. Also,
if this option is checked and DHCP is selected, DHCP FQDN options are
automatically disabled. You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
WINS (Windows Internet Name Service)
• Protocol: Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system. Reboot the machine to
You can configure the WINS server. WINS is used in the Windows operating apply the change.
system. Select this option.
• IPv6 Address: Shows the IPv6 address types.
-Link-local Address: This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value FE80.
Display IP address This address has local link scope and is automatically generated.
-Stateless Address: This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router
You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Notification Bar. If you advertised prefix and interface identifier. On a interface like Ethernet,
select this option the IP address will show on the Notification Bar. interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the
machine. The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations.
More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement, but
only one will be displayed in the display screen.

-Stateful Address: This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6 Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet > 802.1x from the home screen
server. or Apps.
-Manual Address: This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can • 802.1x : Check to enable this feature.
configure manually.
• 802.1x Authentication Method: Select the authentication algorithm to
• DHCPv6 Configuration: Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us. use.
-Use DHCP as directed by a router: DHCPv6 is enabled when a router -EAP-MD5: Offers minimal security. The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to
advertises to use DHCPv6. dictionary attacks, and does not support key generation.
-Always Enable DHCP: Regardless of router advertisement, use DHCPv6 to -PEAP: Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft desktop
acquire an IPv6 address. clients and servers. For other users, it is not recommended.
-Never use DHCP: Disables DHCPv6. -EAP-MS-CHAPv2: MS-CHAPv2 provides two-way authentication between
• DHCPv6 Unique Identifier: Clients use an DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) to peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response
obtain an IP address from the DHCPv6 server. The server looks up the DUID packet and an authenticator Response message on the Success packet.
in its database and delivers the appropriate configuration data (address, -TLS: This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet
lease times, DNS servers, etc.) to the client. between a client and server.
• DHCPv6 Identity Association Identifier: Each interface has an ID, called an
Identity Association Identifier (IAID), that binds the interface to one or more
IP addresses. Each allocation in the DHCPv6 server includes a DUID and an
IAID pair.
802.1x
You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based authentication. If

this authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed to access through the
protected side of the network until the machine is authorized. Use this feature
to protect your network.

Print settings (Ports to set for network printing)
You can set the ports to use when printing. If you want to print though the
network, you need to select the following ports.
Tap Settings > Management > Report > Network Configuration from the
home screen or Apps then tap Print.
your machine (see "Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)" on page 306).

Set protocols
You can enable/disable the protocols (Standard TCP/IP, LPR, IPP, ThinPrint,
CIFS, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), SLP (Service Location Protocol),
Telnet, SNMP V1/V2 (Simple Network Management Protocol), SNMPv3,
UPnP(SSDP) Protocol, and mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System), SetIP, and
HTTP).
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Network Protocol from the home screen
or Apps.

Network filtering settings
You can set your machine to prevent unlisted IP or MAC addresses from
connecting to the machine.
You can set general network filtering settings.
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Network Security > Network Filtering
from the home screen or App.
• MAC Filtering : Disable MAC filtering.
• IPv4 Filtering : Disable IPv4 filtering.
• IPv6 Filtering : Disable IPv6 filtering.

Installing driver over the network
You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software includes
5
drivers, applications, and other support programs. Windows

Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. All
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation. 1 on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.

2
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-
ROM drive and click OK.
•For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation

3 window. Then, click Next.

Select Network on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
4 Next.
1 on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
Follow the instructions in the installation window. From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
5 2
Click Add a device.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
3
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.

• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if 4
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com > You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
find your product > Support or downloads. panel that will show the current machine’s host name.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
a From Charms, select Search. The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
b Click Store.
5
c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
d Click Install. Silent installation Mode
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
product > Support or downloads. are automatically installed on your computer. You can start the silent installation
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to by typing /s or /S in the command window.
install them using the supplied software CD.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.

Command- line Definition Description
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be /p”<port name>” or/ Specifies printer port. Printer port name can be
operated solely. P”<port name>” specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
Network Port will name, IEEE1284 port name or
be created by use network path.
Command- line Definition Description
of Standard TCP/IP
For example:
/s or/S Starts silent installation. Installs machine drivers Port monitor. For
local port, this port • /p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
without prompting any UIs or
must exist on where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
user intervention.
system before means IP address for
network printer. /
being specified by
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
command.
p”hostname”
• /
p"\\computer_name\shar
ed_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared_
printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\share
d_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared_
printer" means the
network path to the
printer by entering two
slashes, the computer
name or local IP address of
the PC sharing the printer,
and then the share name
of the printer.

Command- line Definition Description Command- line Definition Description
/a”<dest_path>” or/ Specifies destination path Since machine drivers should /x or/X Uses existing machine This command provides a
A”<dest_path>” for installation. be installed on the OS driver files to create way to install a printer
specific location, this printer instance if it is instance that uses installed
command applies to only already installed. printer driver files without
The destination application software. installing an additional
path should be a driver.
fully qualified
path. /up”<printer Removes only specified This command provides a
name>” or/ printer instance and not way to remove only specified
UP”<printer name>” the driver files. printer instance from your
/n”<Printer name>” Specifies printer name. With this parameter, you can system without effecting
or/N”<Printer Printer instance shall be add printer instances as your other printer drivers. It will
name>” created as specified wishes. not remove printer driver
printer name. files from your system.
/nd or/ND Commands not to set the It indicates installed machine /d or/D Uninstalls all device This command will remove all
installed driver as a default driver will not be the default drivers and applications installed device drivers and
machine driver. machine driver on your from your system. application software from
system if there are one or your system.
more printer drivers installed.
/v”<share name>” Shares installed machine It will install all supported
If there is no installed
or/V”<share name>” and add other available Windows OS platform’s
machine driver on your
platform drivers for Point machine drivers to system
system, then this option
& Print. and share it with specified
won’t be applied because
<share name> for point and
Windows OS will set installed
print.
printer driver as a default
machine driver. /o or /O Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open
folder after installation. Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.

Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Command- line Definition Description 7
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
/h, /H or /? Shows Command-line Usage. 8 installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
6
Enter the password and click OK (or Install Software).

Mac 9
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
10 Connection Type and click Continue.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
1 on.
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
11 list.
2
Click IP and Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
12
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
13
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
14 the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
3 if Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software and
•For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder. 15 your machine name in Print Using.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.

4 16 Click Add.
Click Continue.
5 17 Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.

6 18 After the installation is finished, click Close.

Select AppSocket/HP JetDirect and enter your machine’s IP address.
10
7
Linux
Click Forward button and add it to your system.
11
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
8
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads). UNIX
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
1 on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. • Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 8).
Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system. • The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
2 type “”.
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied
3 thepackage to.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Operating System" on page 8).
Extract the package.

4 To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
Move to uld folder.
5 package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your
Execute ” ./install.sh“ command (If you are not logged in as root,execute
6 the command with “sudo” as “sudo ./install.sh”).
product > Support or Downloads).
Proceed with installation.

7 Installing the UNIX printer driver package
When installation finished, launch Printing utility (Go to System >
8 Administration > Printing or execute “system-config-printer“
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
command in Terminal program).
Click Add button.

9
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
1 Driver package to your computer.
8 Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
Acquire root privileges.
2
“su -”
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
3 commands on the root terminal:
“accept <printer_name>”
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
“enable <printer_name>”
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.

4
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands. Uninstalling the printer driver package
“gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”
the unpacked directory. The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
5 a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
Run the install script.
6 It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
“./install –i”
b Select the printer to be deleted.
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
UNIX Printer Driver package. d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
installer script.
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results. To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
7

Setting up the printer 11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
Click OK to add the printer.

To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command 12
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
Type the name of the printer.

1
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
2
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
3 Type field. This is optional.
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.

4
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
5
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
6 network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the

7 corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
OS.
Select Copies to set the number of copies.

8
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
9
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
10
Wireless network setup (Optional)
9
• If you want to add wireless feature to the machine, check the option lists Introducing wireless set up methods
and contact the purchasing point to order (see "Available accessories" on
page 235). When you purchase a Wireless/NFC kit (Wireless LAN Option),
install the kit by following the steps described in the Wireless Kit You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose
(Wireless LAN Option) Guide which is enclosed in the kit. After installing the setting method from the below table.
the Wireless Kit (Wireless LAN Option), set the machine to use this
feature.
• Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless • Some wireless network installation types may not be available
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features depending on the model or country.
by model" on page 8). • It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points.
If you do not set the password on Access Points, they might be exposed
to illegal access from unknown machines including PCs, smart phones
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, and printers. Refer to the Access Point user' guide for password settings.
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information
before proceeding with the machine installation. Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference
From the computer See "Using a network cable" on page

323.
With Access From the machine’s See "Using the WPS Settings menu" on
Point control panel page 321.
See "Using the Wi-Fi Networks" on

page 323.
See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile

Wi-Fi Direct setup
printing" on page 325.

Choosing your type
10
Using the WPS Settings menu

There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network.
If your machine and access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected • The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
Setup™ (WPS), then you can easily configure the wireless network settings machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS Settings menu on
through the WPS Settings menu without the need for a computer. the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router)
respectively.
• If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. • The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
• When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access
point (or wireless router) you are using.
Items to prepare
• Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).
• Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
• Networked computer (PIN mode only)

Connecting WPS Connecting in PIN mode
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Wi-Fi from the home screen or App.
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a 1
typical wireless network environment.
Type in the ID and Password.
2
Connecting in PBC mode
1
If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
2 on page 163.
Tap WPS Settings > Connect via PIN.
3
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.
on page 163.
4
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
Tap WPS Settings > Connect via PBC.
3 5 Follow the instruction on the display screen.
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
4 The messages are displayed on the display screen
Follow the instruction on the display screen.

5
The messages are displayed on the display screen

Items to prepare
11
Using the Wi-Fi Networks

• Access point
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless • Network-connected computer
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your • Software CD that was provided with your machine
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network. • A machine installed with a wireless network interface
• Network cable
1
2 The machine will display a list of available networks from which to Printing a network configuration report
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the
corresponding security key. You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
Select the Wi-Fi network option you want.
3 See "Report" on page 295.
12
Using a network cable IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)

This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is
network, for information about your network configuration. the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to See "Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)" on page 306.
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.

Configuring the machine’s wireless network 5 When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
Click Wi-Fi > Wizard.
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when 6
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network. 7
Click Next.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service. 8
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network password) and click Next.
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection
9 the setup is right, click Apply.
status.
13
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If

1 not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
2 your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
For example,
2 your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3
4
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the 3

4 • You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.
• The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP
services.
on page 163. • The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct
is 4.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network

5 Settings.
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
Click Wi-Fi.
6 You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
You can turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.
7
From the machine
14
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing 1
Wi-Fi Direct is a secure and easy-to-use peer-to-peer connection between a Wi- 2
Fi Direct-enabled printer and mobile device. Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network. on page 163.
Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

3
Enable Wi-Fi Direct.
4
15
Troubleshooting for wireless network

From the network-connected computer
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
Access SyncThru™ Web Service and select Settings > Network
1 Settings > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Direct™.
user's guide.
Enable Wi-Fi Direct™ and set other options. • Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be
2 turned on.
• Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from
Setting up the mobile device the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the
signal.
• After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct. • Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
• After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing communication.
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your
smartphone. • Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it
• When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile
try searching for the machine again.
device.
• If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter • Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button. check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.

• Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured • The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless interfere with the wireless signal.
router) administrator. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave
• Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the oven and some Bluetooth devices.
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the • Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again.
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.
• The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 4.
Register the product's MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on
the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address
that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the Mac address of your
machine by printing a network configuration report.
• Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
• This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
• The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
• The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless
signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.

Using the NFC feature (Optional)
16
If you want to add NFC feature to the machine, check the option lists and Requirements
contact the purchasing point to order (see "Available accessories" on page
235). When you purchase a Wireless/NFC Kit (Wireless LAN Option), install
• NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled, supported mobile apps installed mobile
the kit by following the steps described in the Wireless/NFC Kit (Wireless
device with Android OS 4.0 or higher.
LAN Option) Guide which is enclosed in the kit. After installing the Wireless
Kit (Wireless LAN Option), set the machine to use this feature.
Only Android OS 4.1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi-Fi Direct
feature on your mobile device when you enable the NFC feature. We
The NFC (Near Field Communication) printer allows you to directly print from
recommend you to upgrade your mobile device to Android OS 4.1 or higher
your mobile device just by holding your mobile device over the NFC tag on to use the NFC feature.
Wireless/NFC Kit (Wireless LAN Option). It does not require installing print driver
or connecting to an access point. You just need NFC supported mobile device.
• Wi-Fi Direct feature enabled printer (see "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile
In order to use this feature, mobile apps needs to be installed on your mobile
printing" on page 325).
device.
17
• Depending on the material of the mobile device cover, NFC recognition

may not work properly.
Related Apps
• Depending on the mobile device you are using, the transmission speed
may differ. There are some apps that can be used with the NFC feature. The apps can be
downloaded from the Google Play Store.
• This feature is available only for the model with a NFC tag (see "Machine
overview" on page 20). • Samsung Mobile Print: Enables users to print, scan(Only users with the
• Using a cover or a battery other than the ones that came with the mobile machine supports scan), or fax(Only users with the machine supports fax)
device, or a metal cover/sticker can block NFC. photos, documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet
• If NFC devices keep failing to communicate, (see "Using the Samsung Mobile Print App" on page 334).
-Remove the case or cover from the mobile device, then try again. • Samsung Mobile Print Pro: Helps users to get an authentication easily. This
-Reinstall the battery from the mobile device, then try again. app provides one way of getting a user authentication using your mobile
device (see "Using the Samsung Mobile Print Pro App" on page 329).

• Samsung Mobile Print Manager: Enables users to use cloning and wireless
setup features using your mobile device (see "Using the Samsung Mobile If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
Print Manager App" on page 331). on page 163.
18
Tag your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile
Using the Samsung Mobile Print Pro App 4 device) over the NFC tag ( ) on your printer.
Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
You can use it to get an authentication/registration from the Samsung Mobile
Print Pro app.
Authentication from the mobile device
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile
1 device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer.
Open Samsung Mobile Print Pro app.

2
If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Pro installed on your cellphone,
go to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your
mobile device, and just search for download the app and try again. For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
3
Use the same admin ID, Password as when logging in from the machine
(see "Log-in" on page 280.)

Registration from the mobile device
• If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security
tab" on page 163.
• Passcode is for when the administrator chooses Two-Factor
Authentication method. You need to enter a passcode for
authentication. Password and passcode should be different. You can
Open Samsung Mobile Print Pro app.
2 select Two-Factor Authentication from the SyncThru™ Web Service,
select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method > Options button > Login Method > Two-
If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Pro installed on your cellphone, Factor Authentication.
go to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store) on your mobile
device, and just search for download the app and try again.
7 device) over the NFC tag ( ) on your printer.
Press the icon on the Samsung Mobile Print Pro screen.
3 Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
Select On from the Phone login set as default menu.
4
Mobile device ID appears on the Samsung Mobile Print Pro screen.
5
Press Registration.
Type in the ID , Password, Domain, and Passcode, then click OK.

6
Use the same admin ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the

For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Manager installed on your
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile cellphone, go to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store) on your
device before tagging. mobile device, and just search for download the app and try again.
Registration complete message appears on the printer’s touch screen. Press Export.
8 3
19
4
Using the Samsung Mobile Print Manager App Use the same admin ID, Password as when logging in from the machine
If you have more than one printer and need to set the same settings on each
printer, you can easily do it using the Samsung Mobile Print Manager app. If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
Touch your cellphone on the NFC tag on your printer to copy the settings and on page 163.
tap on the printer you want to set the setting.
When exporting the data, you can save more than one data. When
importing the data, you can select the data from the list and import.
Exporting(Copying the setting to your mobile

device)
Open Samsung Mobile Print Manager from your mobile device.

2
5 Tag your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile Importing (Applying the settings to the machine)
device) over the NFC tag ( ) on your printer.
Wait few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer. Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile

2
If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Manager installed on your
cellphone, go to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store) on your
mobile device, and just search for download the app and try again.
Press Import.
3
4
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the (see "Log-in" on page 280.)
• While cloning, the machine is locked. If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
on page 163.
Select the settings you want to apply and press OK.

6 Select the settings you want to copy.
Follow the instruction on the mobile device’s screen.
5
7 Follow the instruction on the mobile device’s screen.
6

Tag your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled features are on your mobile
2
If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print Manager installed on your
cellphone, go to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store) on your
Mobile device Samsung Mobile Print Pro screen appears.

3
Press Wi-Fi Setup.

4
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
device before tagging. If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
• While cloning, the machine is locked. on page 163.
If the access point (or wireless router) is connected to the connection

5
Wireless Setup confirmation window appears, then click OK.If the access point (or
wireless router) not connection, select the desired access point (or
You can copy wireless setting from your phone to your printer by touching your wireless router) and click OK, then click OK.
mobile device on the NFC tag on your printer.

6
20
device) over the NFC tag ( ) on your printer. Using the Samsung Mobile Print App
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print,
scan(Only users with multi-functional printers), or fax(Only users with multi-
functional printers) photos, documents, and web pages directly from your
smartphone or tablet.
Printing
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
Open Samsung Mobile Print app.

2
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print installed on your cellphone, go
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your
device before tagging. mobile device, and just search for download the app and try again.
Follow the instruction on the mobile device’s screen.

7 3 Select print mode.
Select the content you want to print.

4
If necessary, change the print option by pressing the icon.

5 Tag your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile Scanning
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to send a job to the printer. Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile

2
If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print installed on your cellphone, go
to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your
Select scan mode.

3
page 45).
For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile If necessary, change the scan option by pressing the .
The printer starts printing.

6

5 Tag your mobile device (usually located on the back of the mobile Sending Fax
Wait few seconds for the mobile device to send a job to the printer. Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile

2
If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print installed on your cellphone, go
to the application store (Samsung Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your
Select fax mode.

3
Select the content you want to send fax.
4
If necessary, enter the fax number and change the fax option by pressing
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile the icon.
The printer starts scanning the content.

6
The scanned data is saved on your mobile device.
If you want to continue scanning, follow the instruction on the app screen.

Wait few seconds for the mobile device to send a job to the printer.
The printer starts faxing the content.

6

Supported Mobile Apps
21 22
Available Apps Downloading Apps
• Samsung Mobile Print: Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that To download apps, go to the application store (Play Store, App Store) on your
enables users to print, scan(Only users with the machine supports scan), or mobile device, and just search for “Samsung Mobile Print /Samsung Mobile
fax(Only users with the machine supports fax) photos, documents, and web Print Pro/Samusng Mobile Print Manager.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple
pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung Mobile Print is devices on your computer.
not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones but also with
your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a network • Samsung Mobile Print
connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi access -Android: Search for Samsung Mobile Print from Play Store, and then
point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t necessary download the app.
– just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will
-iOS: Search for Samsung Mobile Print from App Store, and then download
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
the app.
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung
multifunction, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for quick • Samsung Mobile Print Pro/Samusng Mobile Print Manager
and easy viewing on your mobile device (see "Using the Samsung Mobile -Android: Search for Samsung Mobile Print Pro or Samusng Mobile Print
Print App" on page 334). Manager from Play Store, and then download the app.
• Samsung Mobile Print Pro: Helps users to get an authentication easily. This
app provides one way of getting a user authentication using your mobile 23
device (see "Using the Samsung Mobile Print Pro App" on page 329).
Supported Mobile OS
• Samusng Mobile Print Manager: Enables users to use cloning and wireless
setup features using your mobile device (see "Using the Samsung Mobile • Samsung Mobile Print
Print Manager App" on page 331).
-Android OS 2.3 or higher
-iOS 5.0 or higher

Supported Mobile Apps
• Samsung Mobile Print Pro/Samusng Mobile Print Manager
-NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled, supported mobile apps installed mobile
device with Android 4.0 or higher

AirPrint
Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain. Then click on
Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
4 LOGIN.
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
AirPrint allows you to print directly from iPhone, iPad and iPod touch When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
running the latest version of iOS.
5 Network Settings.
Click AirPrint.
24
6
Setting up AirPrint 25
Printing via AirPrint

Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
methods.
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
1
1
Touch the action icon( ).
2
2 your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
3
For example,
Touch Print button. Print it out.
4
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
3 click the print center icon ( ) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
the print center.

Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
5 website.
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain. Then click on
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome 6 LOGIN.
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the
website (http://google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://support.google.com/ machine (see "Log-in" on page 280.)
cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud Print™.
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure

26
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Registering your Google account to the printer Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
Registering from the Chrome Browser

When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
7 Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
• Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
Enter your printer’s name and description.
wireless network that has access to the Internet. 8
• You should create your Google account in the advance.
Click Register.
9
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
Open the Chrome browser.
1
Visit www.google.com. If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
2 appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
3
Click Finish printer registration.
4 Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key 10
or click Go.

Google Cloud Print™
Click Manage your printers. Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
11 2
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Tap the option button of the document that you want to print.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
3
Tap the send button.
4
27
Tap the Cloud Print button.

Printing with Google Cloud Print™ 5
Set the printing options if you want.
6
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you
Tap Click here to Print.
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™ 7
service.
Printing from the Chrome browser

Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet. The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
Run Chrome.
1
Printing from an application on mobile device 2 Open the document or email that you want to print.
Click the wrench icon in the browser’s top right corner.

The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from 3
Android mobile phone.
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
4
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
1 5 Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
Click the Print button.

If you do not have the application, download it from the application store 6
such as Android Market or App Store.

4. Maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine.
• Monitoring the supplies life 344

• Setting supplies reorder notification 345
• Replacing & redistributing supplies 346
• Finding the serial number 347
• Clearing memory 348
• Cleaning the machine 349
• Tips for storing machine, supplies, and paper 355
• Tips for moving the machine 356
• Printing a demo page 357
Monitoring the supplies life
Check remaining life of the supplies and prepare the supplies in advance.
We recommend you prepare new supplies if the remaining percentage is
You can also print the supplies life report. Select Supplies Information in the
less than 10 % (see "Replacing & redistributing supplies" on page 346).
Report feature (see "Report" on page 295, "Information tab" on page 161).
From the machine
Tap Settings > Management > Supplies Life from the main screen.
1
Check the consumables life.
2
We recommend you prepare new supplies or those that you have used over
90 % of their average yield (see "Replacing & redistributing supplies" on
page 346).
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
From the SyncThru™ Web Service, select the Information tab >
1 Supplies.
Check the remaining percentage.

2
4. Maintenance 344
Setting supplies reorder notification
Set the supplies reorder notification to receive notification emails and prepare
supplies in advance.
See "Supplies Management" on page 290.
4. Maintenance 345
Replacing & redistributing supplies
At this stage, the imaging unit needs to be replaced. Be sure to prepare a new
3
Replacing the toner cartridge imaging unit in advance (see "Ordering supplies and accessories" on page 233).
How to replace the imaging unit (see "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 189).
When the toner cartridge is totally empty:
5
• The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message
of replacing toner. Redistributing toner
• The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory.
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
However, when the toner cartridge is empty, but you can still print black-
and-white print jobs (The submitted job must be in black and white). • White streaks or light printing occurs.
• Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Ordering • Toner low related message appears on the display.
supplies and accessories" on page 233). • The Status LED blinks red.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Be sure to prepare new If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the
toner cartridge in advance (see "Ordering supplies and accessories" on page remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing
233). How to replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. How to redistribute
page 187). the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 185).
When the imaging unit is totally empty:
• The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message
of replacing imaging unit.
• Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine ("Ordering supplies and
accessories" on page 233).
4. Maintenance 346
Finding the serial number
You might need to know the serial number of your machine when calling for a
service. To check the serial number of your machine, follow the steps below.
The serial number is written on the beginning of all the machine reports.
Tap Settings > Management > Report > Usage Counter > Print from
1 the home screen or Apps.
OR
Select the Information tab > Usage Counters from the SyncThru™ Web
Service.
Check the serial number.

2
4. Maintenance 347
Clearing memory
There are few ways to clear memory to ensure the memory capacity of your Clearing fax memory without printing a fax job
machine. Select one of the ways below.
6
If you clear fax memory without checking the fax job by printing it first, you
might erase jobs that you do not want to. Be careful not to erase important
Clearing stored documents
documents.
Check the stored documents before clearing machine memory.

Tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps.
1
Tap Box from the main screen.
1 2 Select the Current Job tab from the display screen.
Touch and hold folder or document you want to erase from the list.
2 3 Select the job(s) you want to erase than press Delete.
Tap > Delete.
3 If you want to erase all the jobs, press Delete All.
To erase only fax jobs on the list, select fax jobs with in the Job Type list and click
7
Delete.
Clearing fax memory
When the fax memory is full, you can erase stored fax memory. There are two
ways to erase the fax memory, follow the steps below:
Clearing fax memory by printing a fax job

Print received fax(es). Fax memory will automatically be erased.
4. Maintenance 348
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
4. Maintenance 349
9
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
• Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.
• Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.

• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).
4. Maintenance 350
4. Maintenance 351
10
Cleaning the pickup roller
4. Maintenance 352
11
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

1
Lift and open the scanner lid.
2
4. Maintenance 353
Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry.
3
1 Scanner lid
2 Scanner glass
3 Document feeder glass
4 White bar
Close the scanner lid.

4
4. Maintenance 354
Tips for storing machine, supplies, and paper
• Keep them in a cool place with no humidity.
14
• Keep them covered so that dusts cannot be accumulated. Paper

• Keep them out of water.
• Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.
12
• Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor.
Machine • Do not place heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packed or
unpacked.
• When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the • Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle
inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause or curl.
damage to the machine or reduce print quality.
• Keep it in a temperatures between 15°C ~30°C and humidity between 10%
• When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the ~ 70%.
machine securely.
13
Toner cartridge/ Imaging unit
To get the best, print quality from the toner cartridge, keep the following
guidelines in mind:
• Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it’s ready to use.
• Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty does not cover
damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.
• Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine.
• Keep it in a stable place so the toner dust is not slanted to one side.
4. Maintenance 355
Tips for moving the machine
• When moving or storing the machine, press the unlock button to fold down
• When moving the machine, do not subject the control panel to hard the control panel. The unlock button is located on the top side of the control
impacts as this may damage the screen or border of the control panel. panel.
• The warranty does not cover damage from falls or impacts due to the
intentional or unintentional actions of the user.
• When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the
inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause
damage to the machine or reduce print quality.
• When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the
machine securely.
4. Maintenance 356
Printing a demo page
Print a demo page to check the print quality of the machine if you have not used
the machine for sometime.
15
From the machine
See "Report" on page 295.
16
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
See "Information tab" on page 161.
4. Maintenance 357
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
the Samsung customer care center.
02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/
be/support (Dutch)
Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite BELGIUM
www.samsung.com/
021 36 11 00 www.samsung.com/ be_fr/support (French)
ALGERIA
n_africa/support
800-10-7260 www.samsung.com/
0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com/ BOLIVIA cl/support
ARGENTINE [HHP] 4828210
ar/support
051 331 999 www.samsung.com/
0-800-05-555 www.samsung.com/ BOSNIA
ARMENIA support
support
8007260000 www.samsung.com/
1300 362 603 www.samsung.com/ BOTSWANA
AUSTRALIA support
au/support
0800-124-421 (Demais cidades e www.samsung.com/
0800 - SAMSUNG (0800 - www.samsung.com/
AUSTRIA regiões) br/support
7267864) at/support BRAZIL
4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes
0-88-555-55-55 www.samsung.com/ centros)
AZERBAIJAN
support
800 111 31 , Безплатна www.samsung.com/
8000-GSAM (8000-4726) www.samsung.com/ BULGARIA
телефонна линия bg/support
ae/support (English)
BAHRAIN 200 www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/ BURUNDI
support
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
7095- 0077 www.samsung.com/
810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/ CAMEROON
BELARUS africa_fr/support
support
BANGLADESH
in/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 358

Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ 8009 4000 only from landline, toll www.samsung.com/
CYPRUS
ca/support(English) free gr/support
CANADA
www.samsung.com/ 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/
ca_fr/support (French) CZECH
cz/support
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/
CHILE cl/support DENMARK
[HHP] 02-24828200 dk/support
400-810-5858 www.samsung.com/ 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com/

CHINA
cn/support latin/support
(Spanish)
Bogotá 600 12 72Gratis desde www.samsung.com/ DOMINICA
cualquier parte del país 01 8000 co/support www.samsung.com/
COLOMBIA latin_en/support
112 112 ó desde su celular
#SAM(726) (English)
0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com/ 499999 www.samsung.com/

DRC
latin/support support
00-800-1-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
(Spanish) 1-800-10-72670 www.samsung.com/
COSTA RICA
www.samsung.com/ 1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786) latin/support
latin_en/support (Spanish)
ECUADOR
(English) www.samsung.com/
072 726 786 www.samsung.com/ latin_en/
CROATIA support(English)
hr/support
8000 0077 www.samsung.com/ 08000-726786 www.samsung.com/

Cote D’ Ivoire EGYPT eg/support
africa_fr/support 16580

0818 717100 www.samsung.com/ 0800-10077 www.samsung.com/

EIRE GHANA
ie/support 0302-200077 africa_en/support
800-6225 www.samsung.com/ 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 www.samsung.com/

latin/support 7864) only from land line(+30) gr/support
(Spanish) GREECE
EL SALVADOR 210 6897691 from mobile and
www.samsung.com/ land line
latin_en/support
(English)
1-800-299-0033 latin/support
800-7267 www.samsung.com/ (Spanish)
ESTONIA GUATEMALA
ee/support www.samsung.com/
030-6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi/ latin_en/support
FINLAND (English)
support
01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/ 800-2791-9267 www.samsung.com/

FRANCE latin/support
fr/support 800-2791-9111
(Spanish)
0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw. www.samsung.com/ HONDURAS
www.samsung.com/
0180 6 7267864* de/support
latin_en/support
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw. (English)
GERMANY
0180 6 67267864* (*0,20 €/Anruf (852) 3698 4698 www.samsung.com/
aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem hk/support (Chinese)
Mobilfunk max. 0,60 €/Anruf) HONG KONG www.samsung.com/
0-800-555-555 www.samsung.com/ hk_en/support
GEORGIA (English)
support

0680SAMSUNG (0680-726- www.samsung.com/ 0800 545 545 www.samsung.com/

KENYA
HUNGARY 786)0680PREMIUM (0680-773- hu/support support
648)
183-CALL (183-2255) www.samsung.com/
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free1800 www.samsung.com/ ae/support (English)
INDIA KUWAIT
266 8282 - Toll Free in/support www.samsung.com/
021-56997777 www.samsung.com/ ae_ar/support (Arabic)
INDONESIA id/support
08001128888 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/
KYRGYZSTAN
kz_ru/support
021-8255 www.samsung.com/
IRAN
iran/support 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/
LATVIA
lv/support
800-SAMSUNG www.samsung.com/
ITALIA (800.7267864)[HHP] it/support 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/
LITHUANIA
800.Msamsung (800.67267864) lt/support
1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com/ 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/

LUXEMBURG
JAMAICA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) latin_en/support support
(English)
0800 333 www.samsung.com/
MACAU
0120-363-905 www.samsung.com/ support
JAPAN
jp/support
MACEDONIA 023 207 777
JORDAN 06 5777444 levant/support
MALAYSIA 603-77137477 (Overseas my/support
(English)
contact)
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799, www.samsung.com/
KAZAKHSTAN
VIP care 7700) support 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
MEXICO
mx/support

0-800-614-40 www.samsung.com/ 001-800-5077267 www.samsung.com/

MOLDOVA
support latin/support(Spanish)
NICARAGUA www.samsung.com/
7-495-363-17-00 www.samsung.com/
MONGOLIA latin_en/support
support
(English)
MONTENEGRO 815 56480 www.samsung.com/
support NORWAY
no/support
MOROCCO 800-SAMSUNG (800 - 726 7864) www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
847267864 / 827267864 www.samsung.com/ OMAN
MOZAMBIQUE www.samsung.com/
support
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
MYANMAR 0800-Samsung (72678) www.samsung.com/
support PAKISTAN
pk/support
08 197 267 864 www.samsung.com/
NAMIBIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/
support
800-0101 latin/support
0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com/ (Spanish)
NIGERIA PANAMA
africa_en/support www.samsung.com/
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) www.samsung.com/ latin_en/support
NETHERLANDS (English)
(€ 0,10/Min) nl/support

NEW ZEALAND
nz/support

009-800-542-0001 www.samsung.com/ 800-CALL (800-2255) www.samsung.com/

latin/support ae/support (English)
(Spanish) QATAR
PARAGUAY www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/ ae_ar/support (Arabic)
latin_en/support
(English) RWANDA
support
PERU 08008 726 78 64 (08008 www.samsung.com/
pe/support ROMANIA
SAMSUNG )Apel GRATUIT ro/support
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]1-800- www.samsung.com/
8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.com/
8-7267864 [Globe landline and ph/support RUSSIA
PHILIPPINES ru/support
Mobile]02-4222111 [Other
landline] 920021230 www.samsung.com/
sa/support
0 801-172-678* lub +48 22 607- www.samsung.com/
93-33 *[HHP] 0 801-672-678* lub pl/support SAUDI ARABIA www.samsung.com/
POLAND +48 22 607-93-33** (koszt sa_en/support
połączenia według taryfy (English)/
operatora)
SENEGAL
808 20 7267 www.samsung.com/ africa_fr/support
PORTUGAL
pt/support
SERBIA
1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com/ rs/support
latin/support
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
(Spanish) SINGAPORE
PUERTO RICO sg/support
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support 080 697 267090 726 786 www.samsung.com/
SLOVENIA
(English) rs/si

0800 - SAMSUNG(0800-726 786) www.samsung.com/ 0800 755 755 www.samsung.com/

SLOVAKIA TANZANIA
sk/support support
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864) www.samsung.com/ 0-2689-3232,1800-29-3232 www.samsung.com/

SOUTH AFRICA THAILAND
support th/support
0034902172678[HHP] www.samsung.com/ 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/

SPAIN
0034902167267 es/support latin/support
TRINIDAD & (Spanish)
00941175405400094115900000 www.samsung.com/
SRI LANKA TOBAGO www.samsung.com/
support
latin_en/support
1969 www.samsung.com/ (English)
SUDAN
support
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/ TURKEY
SWEDEN tr/support
se/support
0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/ TUNISIA
n_africa/support
ch/support (German)
SWITZERLAND 800-SAMSUNG (800 -726 7864) www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/support (French) U.A.E
www.samsung.com/
18252273 www.samsung.com/ ae_ar/support (Arabic)
SYRIA levant/support
(English) 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/
UK
uk/support
8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/
TADJIKISTAN U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/
support
-Consummer us/support
TAIWAN Electonics
tw/support

Country/Region Customer Care Center WebSite
U.S.A (Mobile 1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786) www.samsung.com/

Phones) [HHP] 1-888-987-HELP(4357) us/support

UGANDA
support
ua/support (Ukrainian)
UKRAINE www.samsung.com/
ua_ru/support
(Russian)
000- 405-437-33 www.samsung.com/

latin/support(Spanish)
URUGUAY www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/
UZBEKISTAN
support
0-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/

VENEZUELA
ve/support

VIETNAM
vn/support
0211 350370 www.samsung.com/

ZAMBIA
support

Glossary
ADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
mentioned in this user’s guide. feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
802.11 AppleTalk
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is
802).
now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
802.11b/g/n BIT Depth

802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
BMP
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
Glossary 366
Glossary
BOOTP Coverage
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced the coverage.
operating system.
CSV
CCD
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
when you move the machine. non-Microsoft platforms.
Collation DSDF
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is A Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on
both sides of the paper.
Control Panel
Default
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine. The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
Glossary 367
Glossary
DHCP DPI
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to in the image, and a larger file size.
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
DRPD
DIMM Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company

service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. different telephone numbers.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
Duplex
DLNA
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a home network to share information with each other across the network. a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
DNS Duty Cycle

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
Dot Matrix Printer
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
Glossary 368
Glossary
ECM EtherTalk
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise. in favor of TCP/IP networking.
Emulation FDI
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its FTP
internal state.
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
Ethernet intranet).
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area

networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame Fuser Unit
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Glossary 369
Glossary
Gateway IEEE
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
allows access to another computer or network. related to electricity.
Grayscale IEEE 1284

A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
gray. type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Halftone
Intranet
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
smaller number of dots. possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
Mass storage device (HDD)
Mass storage device (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is IP address
a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly
rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
Glossary 370
Glossary
IPM ITU-T
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within established to standardize and regulate international radio and
one minute. telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
IPP
telecommunication.
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used ITU-T No. 1 chart
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
secure printing solution than older ones. transmissions.
IPX/SPX JBIG
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
JPEG
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
ISO method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
Glossary 371
Glossary
LDAP MH
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
LED
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status faxes.
of a machine.
MMR
MAC address
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a T T.6.
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address Modem
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MFP
MR
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
scanner and etc. encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
Glossary 372
Glossary
NetWare OSI
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for PABX
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape. A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper. PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
Originals developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
Glossary 373
Glossary
PostScript Protocol
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
interpreter to generate an image.
PS
Printer Driver
See PostScript.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
PSTN
Print Media The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used usually routed through the switchboard.
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
RADIUS
PPM
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
minute. (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
PRN file
Resolution
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
Glossary 374
Glossary
SMB TCP/IP
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication Internet and most commercial networks run.
mechanism.
TCR
SMTP
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
TIFF
message to the server.
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
SSID format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 applications.
characters.
Toner Cartridge
Subnet Mask
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a
address. combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in
the paper.
Glossary 375
Glossary
TWAIN Watermark
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
Macintosh operating systems. also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
UNC Path
WEP
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory> provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and WIA
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
resource is located. introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
USB
WPA
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
port to multiple peripherals. WEP.
Glossary 376
Glossary
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-
independent document format.
Glossary 377
Index
A authority 164 126, 143
customer support 302
accessories B
installing 237 D
booklet printing 75
ordering 235
booklets 75 default paper selection
accounting 164
printing 292
address book 162 C
default settings
group 162
certificate 163 setting a fax header 135
inividual 162
checking stored document 348 tray setting 59
adjusting
cleaning deleting
altitude 281, 286
inside 350 address book 147
AirPrint 340
outside 349 demo page 357
alerts 161
pickup roller 352 device options 237
altitude adjustment 281, 286
scan unit 353 direct printing utility 82
answering machine/fax 137
cleaning a machine 349 display screen 23
AnyWeb Print 167
connect displaying
application 293 printer cable 24 IP address 307
enable/disable 294
control panel 23 document box
installing 294
convention 14 understanding the document
managing 293
copy box screen 181
uninstalling 294
setting 162 document feeder 47
viewing 294
copying driver installation 312
authentication 289
basic copying 103, 116 Unix 317
login 160, 280
understanding the copy screen 94, 108, duplex printing
Index 378
Index
print 76 changing the receive mode 137 IPv6 164
in answering machine/fax 137, 139 MAC 163, 164
E
secure receiving 138, 139 network 311
easy document creator 118, 169 fax sending firmware 165
e-book conversion 169 delay sending 136 front view 1 21
editing resending automatically 136
group address 147 sending a fax 135 G
individual address 146 fax, email general icons 14
error correction mode 140 individual address 145 general settings 281, 282, 287, 295, 297
error message 208 faxing glossary 366
ethernet 306 changing receiving mode 137 google cloud printing 341
external authentication server 164 delaying a fax transmission 136 group
forwarding 139 group address 146
F preparing to fax 123
favorites settings, for printing 73 receiving 137 H
fax receiving a fax in memory 139 HTTP settings 163
address book 162 receiving in Ans/Fax mode 137
receiving in Tel mode 137 I
clearing stored documents 348
forward 141 sending 135 id copy 105
prefix dial 140 setting the fax header 135 inner view 22
printing 141 features 6
IPP settings 162
secure receive 141 print media feature 249
toll save 140, 141 printer driver 63 J
fax receiving filtering 164 jam
Index 379
Index
clearing jam 192 in the document feeder 47 address book 162
tips for avoiding paper jams 191 originals on the scanner glass 45 application 165, 293
JPEG paper in multi-purpose tray 52 user 164
USB scanning memory device 145, 150 paper in the tray1 50 managing USB memory 244
special media 55 margin
K log 165 printing 292
keyboard login 160, 280 memory
understanding the keyboard 38 LPR/LPD settings 162 clearing memory 348
memory upgrading 239
L M
moving 356
LED Mac multi-purpose tray
machine status 26, 28 common Mac problems 229 loading 52
understanding the status LED 26 driver installation for network tips on using 52
link 165 connected 316 using special media 55
Linux driver reinstallation for USB cable
common Linux problems 230 connected 43 N
driver installation for network printing 87 network
connected 317 scanning 120 authentication 289
printer properties 89 system requirements 254 driver installation
printing 89 mac scanning 120 Linux 317
scanning 121 machine detail 301 Mac 316
system requirements 255 machine protocols 310 UNIX 317
linux scanning 121 maintenance parts 236 Windows 312
loading managing installing environment 256, 304
Index 380
Index
SetIP program 323 poster, print 74 printing
setting up 304 postScript driver changing the default print settings 84
wireless network setup 320 troubleshooting 231 changing the print percentage 77
network filtering 311 power save 284 duplex 162, 292
N-up printing print fitting your document to
Windows 74 mobile OS 338 a selected paper size 77
n-up printing mobileprint 338 Linux 89
Mac 87 print media Mac 87
card stock 58 margin 162, 292
O multiple pages on one sheet of paper
envelope 56
optional tray 235 Mac 87
guidelines 49
ordering 235 Windows 74
labels 57
original document network printing 309
output support 249
loading paper orientation 162, 292
paper tab in printer preferences 68
in the document feeder 47 poster 74
preprinted paper 58
on the scanner glass 45 printing a document
setting the paper size 59
Windows 64
overlay printing setting the paper type 59
printing on both sides of paper
create 80 special media 55
Mac 88
delete 81 printer preferences
Windows 76
print 81 Linux 89
printing to a file 86
printer properties
P setting as a default machine 85
opening printer preferences 66
UNIX 91
paper size 59 printer status using direct printing utility 82
paper type 60 general information 173
using overlay 80
Index 381
Index
using watermarks 78 demo page 295 system 163
printing a document requirements security settings
Linux 89 SyncThruTM Web Service 159 user authentication 289
Mac 87 serial number 347
S
UNIX 91 server settings 303
problem safety service contact numbers 358
operating system problems 227 information 15 SetIP program 323
problems symbols 15
settings
copying problems 223 samsung printer experience 175 copy 162
faxing problems 225 Samsung Printer Status 173 current 161
paper feeding problems 214 scan DNS 306
power problems 213 email server 162 ethernet 306
printing quality problems 218 scanner fax 162
scanning problems 224 glass 45 gernal 281, 282, 287, 295, 297
touch screen 214 loading documents 45 HTTP 163
scanner glass machine 162
Q
loading documents 45 margin 162, 292
quick copy 104 scanning network 162, 303, 306
Linux scanning 121 printer 162
R
Mac 120 scan 162
Raw TCP/IP settings 162 TWAIN 117 security 163
rear view 22 searching network 163
regulatiory information 257 address book 147 server 303
report 295 security server for printing 309
Index 382
Index
sound 283 connecting to 159 replacing the cartridge 187
SyncThruTM Web Service 163 copy 162 replacing toner 346
TCP/IPv4 306 external authentication server 164 sending a toner notification 345
tray 282 fax 162 toner unit
WINS 307 information tab 161 sending the toner reorder notification 345
sound 283 log 165 touch screen
specifications 247 maintenance tab 165 problem solving 214
print media 249 network 162 tray
stored documents 348 printer 162 auto continue 60
storing requirements 159 loading paper in multi-purpose tray 52
machine 355 scan 162 ordering an optional tray 235
paper 355 security tab 163 paper substitution 60
supplies 355 settings 161 setting the paper size and type 59
settings tab 162 Tray 1 59
supplies
user access control 164
available supplies 234 tray setting 282
user profile 164
monitoring the supplies life 344 TWAIN, scan 117
what is 159
ordering 234
replacing toner cartridge 187 U
T
storing 355 UNIX
TCP/IPv4 306
SyncThruTM Web Service 159 driver installation for network
TCP/IPv6 307, 308
accounting 164 connected 317
address book tab 162 terminology 277 printing 91
application management 165 toner cartridge Unix
configuring 163 redistributing toner 185, 346 system requirements 255
Index 383
Index
usage common Windows problems 227
counter 35, 161 driver installation for network
supplies 161 connected 312
usb driver installation for USB cable
understanding the usb screen 242 connected 39
USB cable driver reinstallation for USB cable
driver installation 39 connected 42
driver reinstallation 43 printing 62
USB Drive scanning 107
how to manage 244 system requirements 253
printing 243 using SetIP 323
user wireless
managing 164 WPS
profile 164 disconnecting 322
user access control 164 wireless network

network cable 323
using help 73, 88
WSD settings 162
W
watermark
create 78
delete 79
edit 79
print 78
Windows
Index 384

User's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationsamsung

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s Guide

ADVANCED (ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)

2. Media and Tray 4. Copying

5. Scan & Send(Scanning) 8. Management Tools

10. Supplies and Accessories

Ordering supplies and accessories 233

This chapter includes:

• Supports various paper sizes .

Support XOA applications

The machine supports XOA custom applications.

Operating System M458x series

(●: Included, Blank: Not available)

Software M458x series

SPL printer driver

PCL printer driver ●

XPS printer drivera ●

Direct Printing Utilitya ●

Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC Settings ●

Samsung Printer Status ●

Samsung AnyWeb Printa ●

Samsung Easy Document Creator ●

Easy Capture Manager ●

SyncThru™ Web Service ●

SyncThru Admin Web Service ●

Easy Eco Driver ●

Fax Samsung Network PC Fax ●

Scan Twain scan driver ●

(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)

Features M458x series

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ●

Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN ●

Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LANa ○

Google Cloud Print™ ●

Duplex (2-sided) printing ●

USB Drive deviceb ●

Optional tray (SCF) ○

Document Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) ●

Scan Scanning to email ●

Scanning to SMB server ●

Scanning to FTP server ●

Copy ID card copying ●

Reduced or enlarged copying ●

(●: Supported, ○: Optional, Blank: Not supported)

Where can I download the machine’s driver?

machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage. General icons

• The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.

Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:

• Document is synonymous with original.

• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.

• Machine refers to printer or MFP.

Important safety symbols

Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or

Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.

Caution Operating method

During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,

Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.

When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,